222
Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management Administrator's Guide Release 11.1.2.2

Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management

Administrator's Guide

Release 11.1.2.2

Page 2: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Financial Close Management Administrator's Guide, 11.1.2.2

Copyright © 2011, 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Authors: EPM Information Development Team

Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respectiveowners.

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use anddisclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement orallowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit,perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilationof this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you findany errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf ofthe U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS:

Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customersare "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable Federal AcquisitionRegulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, andadaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, tothe extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, CommercialComputer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.

This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is notdeveloped or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that may create a risk ofpersonal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take allappropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliatesdisclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.

This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and servicesfrom third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of anykind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsiblefor any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.

Page 3: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Documentation Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 1. About Financial Close Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Close Manager Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Account Reconciliation Manager Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Financial Close Management Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Optimizing Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Setting User Preferences for the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Using Close Manager With Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Part I. Close Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 2. About Close Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Financial Close Management Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Sample Task Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Scenario 1 - User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Scenario 2 - User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Scenario 3 - Approver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Scenario 4 - Power User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Scenario 5 - Power User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Chapter 3. Setting Up Close Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Setting Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Setting Up Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Assigning Security Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Assigning Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Managing System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Defining Years and Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Defining Years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Defining Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Managing Custom Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Creating Custom Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Editing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Duplicating Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Deleting Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Viewing Custom Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Searching for Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Managing Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Contents iii

Page 4: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Editing Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Viewing Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Searching for Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Deleting Alert Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Managing Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Defining Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Creating Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Editing Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Validating Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Importing Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Exporting Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Deleting Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Managing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Viewing Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Searching for Integration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Chapter 4. Navigating in Close Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Close Manager Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Dashboard View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Task List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Calendar View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Gantt View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Selecting Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Available View Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Displaying Columns in Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Selecting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Reordering Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Sorting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Navigating in Task Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Filtering Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Saving Filtered Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Deleting Filtered Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Viewing Task Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Task Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Chapter 5. Managing Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Creating Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Setting Task Type Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

iv Contents

Page 5: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Setting Task Type Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Specifying Task Type Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Applying Task Type Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Specifying Task Type Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Viewing Task Type History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Editing Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Viewing Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Searching for Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Importing Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Exporting Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Deleting Task Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Chapter 6. Managing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Creating Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Setting Template Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Specifying Template Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Assigning Viewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Applying Template Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Specifying Day Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Embedding Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Viewing Template History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Opening Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Adding Tasks to Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Editing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Importing Tasks into Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Task Import File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Exporting Tasks to Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Reassigning Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Creating Schedules from Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Manually Validating Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Viewing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Searching for Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Deleting Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Chapter 7. Managing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Creating Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Setting Task Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Setting Task Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Specifying Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Specifying Task Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Contents v

Page 6: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Adding Task Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Setting Task Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Setting Task Predecessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Applying Task Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Viewing Task History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Editing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Sorting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Searching for Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Moving Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Deleting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Chapter 8. Managing Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Creating Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Manually Creating Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Setting Schedule Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Assigning Schedule Viewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Applying Schedule Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Adding Instructions to Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Opening Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Editing Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Adding Tasks to Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Importing Tasks into Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Updating Tasks in Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Reassigning Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Authorizing System-Automated Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Setting Schedule Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Viewing Schedule History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Validating Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Locking Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Viewing Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Searching for Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Deleting Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 9. Using Report Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Generating Report Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Viewing Report Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

vi Contents

Page 7: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Part II. Account Reconciliation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Account Reconciliation Manager Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Sample Task Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Scenario 1 – Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Scenario 2 – Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Scenario 3 – Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Scenario 4 – Power User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Chapter 11. Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Setting Up Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Assigning Security Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Assigning Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Managing System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Managing Profile Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Managing Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Defining Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Editing System Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Setting Power User Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Managing Aging Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Managing Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Creating Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Deleting Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Managing Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Creating Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Running Auto-Reconciliations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Viewing Period History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Editing Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Deleting Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Managing Currency Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Importing Currency Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Creating Currency Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Editing Currency Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Deleting Currency Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Managing Custom Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Contents vii

Page 8: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating Custom Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Duplicating Custom Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Editing Custom Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Deleting Custom Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Chapter 12. Navigating in Account Reconciliation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Account Reconciliation Manager Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

List Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Dashboard View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Selecting Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Available View Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Filtering Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Creating Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Editing Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Duplicating Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Deleting Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Viewing Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Reconciliation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 13. Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Creating Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Editing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Deleting Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Using Excel CSV Files for Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Exporting Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Importing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Copying and Pasting Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Using the Profile Actions Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Performing Batch Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Copying Profiles to Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Chapter 14. Managing Reconciliations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Loading Balances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Viewing Data Load Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Copying Profiles to Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Identifying Missing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Opening Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Sending Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Viewing Reconciliations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Performing Reconciliations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

viii Contents

Page 9: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Adding Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Adding Transactions Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Importing Transactions From Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Editing, Copying, and Deleting Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Copying Transactions from Prior Reconciliation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Viewing Prior Reconciliations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Managing Reconciliation Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Reassigning Preparers and Reviewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Reopening Reconciliations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Closing and Locking Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Chapter 15. Using Report Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Generating Report Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Viewing Report Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Appendix A. Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Data Integration Options for Importing Balances into ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

ERP Integrator Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Open Interface Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

File-Based Data Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Data Load Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Planning the ERP Integrator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Multiple Reconciliation Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Same Source System Account Reconciled in Two Profiles in One Process . . . . . . . . . 185

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Configuring System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Registering Target Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Configuring Period Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Configuring Category Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Registering Source Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Registering Source Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Selecting Source Accounting Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Configuring Import Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Configuring Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Configuring Data Load Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Configuring Data Load Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Supported Currency Codes in ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Currency Codes AED - ITL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Currency Codes JMD - USS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Contents ix

Page 10: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Currency Codes UYI - ZWL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

ERP Integrator for ARM Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

x Contents

Page 11: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Documentation Accessibility

For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website athttp://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.

Access to Oracle SupportOracle customers have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.

11

Page 12: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

12 Documentation Accessibility

Page 13: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

1About Financial Close

Management

In This Chapter

Close Manager Functionality .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Account Reconciliation Manager Functionality .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Financial Close Management Prerequisites .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Optimizing Queries ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Setting User Preferences for the Time Zone ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Using Close Manager With Smart View ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Oracle Hyperion Financial Close Management provides a flexible integration framework thatallows end users to leverage services from external applications as part of the close calendar. Theintegration framework is built around industry standards and supports web-based interactivetasks and Web Services based automated tasks.

Financial Close Management has two modules: Close Manager and Account ReconciliationManager.

Close Manager FunctionalityClose Manager helps companies define, execute, and report on the interdependent activities ofa financial close period. It provides centralized monitoring of all close process tasks and providesa visible, automated, repeatable system of record for running close processes.

Functionality includes:

l Defining the close tasks and schedule to ensure the correct flow of tasks

l Automating the management of the close to track the status of close tasks and providenotifications and alerts

l Integration with product tasks

l End user notifications

l Monitoring the overall close status from a central dashboard

l Acting on errors or delays with close tasks

l Analyzing the effectiveness of the close

Close Manager Functionality 13

Page 14: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Account Reconciliation Manager FunctionalityAccount Reconciliation Manager helps companies manage account reconciliation processes,including balance sheet reconciliations, consolidation system reconciliations, and otherreconciliation processes in effect.

Functionality includes:

l Managing assignment of preparation and review responsibility

l Configuring reconciliation formats tailored to each type of account

l End user notifications

l Controlling preparation and review workflow

l Providing visibility into the status of reconciliations and the existence of risk conditions

Financial Close Management PrerequisitesYou install, register, and configure Financial Close Management through Oracle’s EPM SystemInstaller.

For required software components, see Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance ManagementSystem Installation Start Here.

Before you can use Financial Close Management, you must complete these prerequisites:

l Install and configure Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Workspace.

l Install Oracle Hyperion Shared Services and register Financial Close Management withShared Services.

For complete installation instructions, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise PerformanceManagement System Installation and Configuration Guide.

Financial Close Management is integrated in Oracle’s Hyperion EPM System product suite andis displayed in the EPM Workspace.

For information on EPM Workspace tasks and menu options, see the Oracle Hyperion EnterprisePerformance Management Workspace User's Guide, Oracle Hyperion Enterprise PerformanceManagement Workspace Administrator's Guide, and web help.

For information on the manual steps needed to install Event Monitoring, see the Oracle HyperionFinancial Close management Event Monitoring Configuration Addendum.

Optimizing QueriesFor Oracle Database, to optimize queries, after the first large load (for example, tasks, profiles,or balances), and then periodically, perform the following script:

begin dbms_stats.gather_schema_stats('<arm schema>'); end;

For example:

14 About Financial Close Management

Page 15: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

begin dbms_stats.gather_schema_stats('prod7625_abc');end

Setting User Preferences for the Time ZoneYou can specify a user preference for the time zone to use for a Financial Close Managementapplication.

ä To set the time zone:

1 From the EPM Workspace or from Financial Close Management, select File, then Preferences.

2 Click Close Manager or Reconciliation Manager.

3 From the Time zone list, select a time zone, and then click OK.

4 Log off, and then log on again for the change to take effect.

Using Close Manager With Smart ViewWhen you use Financial Close Management with Oracle Hyperion Smart View for Office, donot use the Microsoft Outlook Customize View functionality. Use the Customize fields dialogfrom the right click menu in the Oracle Hyperion Smart View for Office panel.

Setting User Preferences for the Time Zone 15

Page 16: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

16 About Financial Close Management

Page 17: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

P a r t I

Close Manager

In Close Manager:

l About Close Managerl Setting Up Close Managerl Navigating in Close Managerl Managing Task Typesl Managing Templatesl Managing Tasksl Managing Schedulesl Using Report Binders

Close Manager 17

Page 18: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

18 Close Manager

Page 19: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

2About Close Manager

In This Chapter

Financial Close Management Terms ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Process Overview... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Sample Task Flows... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Financial Close Management TermsTasks

A task is a unit of action within Close Manager, for example, data entry or data consolidation.Power users define the tasks that comprise a close process. Users can read task instructions,answer questions, submit, reassign, approve, or reject tasks, and can access tasks from emailnotifications or by logging on to Financial Close Management.

Integration Types

An Integration Type is a definition of a service provided by an application. For example, theConsolidate Integration Type for Oracle Hyperion Financial Management contains parameterssuch as the Point of View dimensions to run the consolidation. A standard set of IntegrationTypes that are integrated with other Oracle applications is included with the installation.

Task Types

Task Types identify and categorize tasks commonly performed during a close period, forexample, Data Entry, or G/L Extract. The Task Type enables you to set default information, suchas settings that need to be input by the user, and questions or instructions that are shared by alltasks of that type. Task Types are often based on Integration Types.

Templates

A template is a set of tasks that are repeatable over close periods. Administrators can createtemplates for different types of close periods, such as monthly or quarterly.

Schedules

A schedule defines the chronologically ordered set of tasks that must be executed for a specificclose period, and is the alignment of a template's generic close days to calendar dates.

Dashboard

The Dashboard view presents a portal-style interface with views into schedules and task lists,and high-level summaries into which you can drill down for greater detail.

Financial Close Management Terms 19

Page 20: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Alerts

Alerts are notifications from Close Manager users on issues that they encounter during the closeprocess, such as hardware or software issues. Users create alerts identifying a problem, and assignthem to be resolved.

Report Binders

Report Binders are summaries of close process activity. They contain a description of all taskdetails that were executed as part of the close schedule. Report Binders enable administratorsand others to review and adjust activities for future periods and are useful for audit purposes.

Process OverviewAn administrator begins by reviewing the tasks required for a close process, and setting up TaskTypes to ensure consistency across tasks and to leverage predefined product integrations.Because many tasks are repeatable over close periods, the administrator saves a set of tasks as atemplate to use for future periods. For example, administrators can set up a monthly or quarterlyclose once, then use it for all months or quarters. Tasks are defined with task predecessors,assignees, and approvers.

Next, the administrator populates the template with the close period tasks.

To initiate the close process for a period, administrators generate a schedule (a chronologicalset of tasks) by selecting a template and assigning calendar dates. The generic tasks in the templateare applied to calendar dates. The system validates the dates on which tasks are to be run. Tobegin the close process, the administrator changes the schedule status from Pending to Open.They can also modify the schedule if needed and monitor it throughout the close cycle.

During the close process, users receive email notifications of assigned tasks, and can click linksin the email for direct access to assigned tasks. Alternatively, users can log on to Financial CloseManagement to review and access assigned tasks in different types of views, for example, theDashboard, a portal-style interface; or Calendar, Gantt, or Task List views. When users completetasks, the tasks are sent to approvers and can be viewed by other users.

Users can raise alerts for issues that they encounter during the close process such as hardwareor software issues. Alerts are forwarded to assignees and approvers for resolution.

Close Manager users can define and generate a Report Binder for a close cycle, which containsa description of the task details that were executed as part of the process. Report Binders enableadministrators and others to review and adjust activities for future periods, and are also usefulfor audit purposes.

20 About Close Manager

Page 21: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Sample Task Flows

Subtopics

l Scenario 1 - User

l Scenario 2 - User

l Scenario 3 - Approver

l Scenario 4 - Power User

l Scenario 5 - Power User

Scenario 1 - UserIn this scenario, a user responds to an email notification of a task to load data, clicks on a linkin the mail and accesses the product from which to load data, and completes the task.

l The user receives an email notification of an outstanding task - Load Salary Data throughOracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management.

l From the email, the user selects the link for the page where the required process isdocumented.

l The user reviews the instructions for the task and selects the Go to Task link to launch FDM.

l The user extracts data through Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management andloads it to Financial Management.

l When the task is completed, the user returns to Close Manager.

l The user enters a comment about the task, and submits it for approval.

Scenario 2 - UserIn this scenario, a user logs on to Close Manager and reviews and completes an assigned task.

l The user logs on to Close Manager and reviews the tasks displayed in the Dashboard in theMy Worklist portlet.

l The user clicks the link for an assigned task - MD&A input.

l The task page is launched with instructions for the task, and a reference document.

l The user reviews the instructions and the reference document, processes the updates, entersa comment about the task, and submits it for approval.

l The system automatically updates the task status and sends a notification to the assignedapprover.

Scenario 3 - ApproverIn this scenario, a user who is assigned as an Approver reviews a current task to determine if itcan be approved.

Sample Task Flows 21

Page 22: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l The assigned Approver receives an email notification of an outstanding task - Review MD&AInput for Services submission.

l From the email, the reviewer selects the link for Review MD&A Input for ServicesSubmission.

l The Task Actions page is launched outlining the process.

l The reviewer reviews the document that the user submitted when completing the task toensure completeness.

l The reviewer enters additional comments and approves the submission.

l If there is another level of approval required, the task is forwarded to the next approver. Ifthe task was the last required approval, the task completes, and the system runs the next taskif it is ready.

l The reviewer also has the option to reject a task instead of approving it, in which case thetask is reassigned to the assignee.

Scenario 4 - Power UserIn this scenario, the Power User monitors the status of close activities through the Dashboard.

l The Power User logs on to Close Manager and opens the Dashboard Status Overview viewto check the status of activities through Day 3.

l From the Dashboard, the user drills down to see the details of the tasks that are not complete.

l The Power User reviews open tasks for comments or attachments provided by assignedusers.

Scenario 5 - Power UserIn this scenario, the Power User sets up a template and tasks for an upcoming close period.

l The Power User logs on to Close Manager and opens the Manage Templates page.

l The Corporate Quarterly Close template contains many of the tasks required for thecorporation quarterly close cycle. From the list of templates, the Power User selects theQuarterly Close template and reviews it.

l The Power User selects the calendar dates on which to line up the template tasks, and createsa schedule from the quarterly template.

l The Power User then adds a task to the template specifically for Quarter 2.

l The Power User opens the schedule, which begins the close process.

22 About Close Manager

Page 23: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3Setting Up Close Manager

In This Chapter

Starting... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Setting Up the System.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Setting Up Users .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Assigning Security Roles ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Assigning Access Rights .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Managing System Settings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Defining Years and Periods ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Managing Custom Attributes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Managing Alert Types ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Managing Integration Types... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Starting

Note: The Shared Services server, the EPM Workspace server, and the Financial CloseManagement server must all be running before you launch Financial Close Management.See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation andConfiguration Guide.

To access Close Manager, log on to EPM Workspace and launch Close Manager.

ä To start Close Manager:

1 From a Web browser, enter the URL for the Financial Close Management Log On page.

The URL is the Web server host name, Web server port, and workspace.

By default, the Workspace URL is http://Server name:19000/workspace/.

2 In the EPM Workspace logon dialog box, enter the system user name and password and click Log On.

If an error message displays indicating that the system is unable to authenticate a user, verifythese conditions:

l The user is provisioned for the application. If not, use Shared Services to provision theuser.

Starting 23

Page 24: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l The user token or session is not timed out. If it has timed out, log off, then log on tostart a session.

l The Web server is configured and running. If there is a problem with the Web server,contact the system administrator.

3 From EPM Workspace, select Navigate, Applications, Financial Close.

Setting Up the SystemThese are the steps required to set up Close Manager:

l Set up users and assign security roles. See “Setting Up Users” on page 24.

l Define years for close process activities. See “Defining Years” on page 27.

l Define periods for close process activities. See “Defining Periods” on page 28.

l Create Integration Types. See “Creating Integration Types” on page 37.

l Create Task Types. See “Creating Task Types” on page 58.

l Create Alert Types. See “Creating Alert Types” on page 33.

l Create custom attributes. See “Creating Custom Attributes” on page 29.

Setting Up UsersBefore working with Close Manager, you must set up users and assign security roles.

To set up users, follow this process:

l Use Shared Services to create, authenticate, and manage users, groups, and roles.

l Use Shared Services to provision users with the Close Manager security roles.

l Assign users access to required elements.

For information on using Shared Services, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise PerformanceManagement System User and Role Security Guide.

Assigning Security RolesAccess to Close Manager modules is dependent on user security roles and the privileges givento the role.

24 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 25: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Security Role Description

Close Userl Schedule Viewer

l Task Owner

l Access to Dashboard, limited by access level

l Modify status, create and modify alerts, comments, and questions, limited by access level

l Create and manage filters

Close Power Userl All Close User privileges

l Create and import tasks

l Create and manage templates and schedules

l Create task types and view tasks types created by others

Close Administratorl All Power User privileges

l Full access to all tasks, templates and schedules

l Define years and periods

l Create and manage Task Types, Integration Types, Custom Attributes, and Alert Types

You assign security roles in Oracle Hyperion Shared Services Console, which displays a list ofusers and groups from the external authentication provider. You can assign security roles togroups or individuals.

ä To assign security roles:

1 From EPM Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Shared Services Console to accessShared Services.

2 Expand the User Directories folder, and then expand the directory where the users reside.

3 Perform one of these actions:

l To assign security roles to a user, select Users.

l To assign security roles to a group, select Group.

4 Search for and select a user or group.

5 Provision the user using one of these methods:

l Right-click and select Provision.

l Select Administration, then Provision.

l Click Provision.

6 From Available Roles, expand Financial Close Management.

7 Select the Financial Close Management application.

8 Select a Financial Close Management role, click the arrow button to add the role to the user, and thenclick Save.

9 Review the summary report and click OK.

Assigning Security Roles 25

Page 26: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Assigning Access RightsAdministrators have unrestricted access to all features. Multiple administrators are allowed, andeach has write access to all objects, including those created by other administrators.Administrators set up user access to tasks by assigning users to tasks with task roles of Owner,Assignee, Approver, or Viewer.

Owners are assigned to every task and must be a Close User, Close Power User, or CloseAdministrator. The task owner automatically has WRITE access to the task when it is applied toa schedule. For pending tasks, the task owner can edit task properties; for example, add or removeinstructions or questions, or add or remove approvers. They cannot modify properties for opentasks. The owner ensures that the task is completed, although they may not be performing actionson the task. Owners receive notifications when the task status changes, and can intervene in thetask workflow at any time. They can reassign the assignee or approvers. They can also act as theassignee, approve the task for an approver, or force the task to close.

Assignees are users responsible for working on the task. They have READ access to all taskinformation. They can add comments, answer questions, submit tasks for approval, create alerts,or reassign the task to other users. They also have READ access to some information about thepredecessor tasks, for example, owners, assignees, status, name, and description. You can giveassignee access only to individuals, not groups. There is only one assignee for each task. Assigneesare optional. If no assignee is assigned, responsibility for the task is assigned to the task owner.

Approvers ensure that the task was done correctly by the assignee and sign off on it. Each taskmay be assigned up to 10 levels of approval. Approvers can only be assigned to individuals, notgroups. Approvers have READ access to all task information. They can add comments, approveor reject tasks, create alerts, or reassign approval to other users. They also have READ access tosome information about the predecessor tasks, for example, owners, assignees, status, name, anddescription.

Viewers may be Close Users, Close Power Users, or Close Administrators. Multiple users maybe assigned to a task as viewers. Viewers receive READ access to all task information, and forparent tasks, to the task information for their children. You can assign the viewer role to groups.Viewers cannot perform task actions and are not part of the task workflow.

Task Assignees and Approvers act as viewers in Task Details. They can view their own tasks inan open schedule.

Access rights apply to Close Manager objects such as templates, schedules, tasks, and alerts, andare inherited from the parent object. For details on access rights, see the Managing Templates,Schedules, Tasks, and Alerts chapters.

Examples:

l If a user has WRITE access to a schedule, that user also has Modify access to every task inthe schedule.

l If a user has READ access to a template, the user also has Read access to every task of thattemplate.

The types of activity rights a user has for an object establish the access rights to that object.

l Viewer - has only READ access to the object.

26 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 27: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Assignee - has WRITE access to a subset of the object attributes and READ access to the rest.

l Approver - has WRITE access to the Status (Approve/Reject) attribute of the object (forexample, an Alert), and READ access for the rest. For example, an approver can addcomments and create alerts.

l Owner - has full WRITE access to the object.

Managing System SettingsTask Attachment Size determines the maximum attachment file size that Close Manager usersare allowed to upload. This setting provides administrators with flexibility in adapting CloseManager to work within limitations of the environment in which it is installed.

You can change the current maximum file size.

ä To assign task attachment size:

1 Select Manage, then System Settings.

2 In Select maximum file upload size, select a value from 5 MB, with incremental values of 5 MB, up to100 MB.

3 Click Save and Close.

Defining Years and Periods

Subtopics

l Defining Years

l Defining Periods

When you define the close process, you define years and periods for which to apply closeactivities. You then assign each schedule a year and period to define the close period for theschedule. You can have multiple schedules running in the same time period, for example, aCorporate schedule and a Regional schedule. Year and period dimensions enable you to groupthese activities.

Defining Years

Note: Defining Years feature is available only to administrators.

The Year dimension designates the year to which the close activities apply and is a flat list. Youcan define, rename, and delete years, and name years with numeric or nonnumeric characters.For example, you can define years such as 2009 and 2010, or FY09 or FY10.

Managing System Settings 27

Page 28: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To define years:

1 Select Manage, then Years.

2 Add, rename, or delete years as needed:

l To add a year, click New and enter a name.

l To rename a year, double-click it, or select a year and click Edit, then rename it.

l To delete a year, select it, and click Delete.

Note: You can multi-select years, and then click Delete.

3 Click OK to save changes.

Defining Periods

Note: The defining periods feature is available only to administrators.

The Period dimension is a hierarchical dimension that designates the time period to which theclose activities apply, for example a month or quarter. You typically define a period with monthsrolling up to quarters within years. For example, you can define a quarterly period of Q1 withthe child members of January, February, and March. You can also define custom period rollups,such as a 13-month reporting period.

You can add siblings and children to periods. A sibling is a member at the same level, such asJanuary and February. A child is a member below a member in the period hierarchy; for example,January is a child member of Q1.

You assign calendar dates to periods when you create schedules.

You can add, edit, reorder, and delete periods.

ä To define periods:

1 Select Manage, and then Periods.

2 Add or remove siblings or child members:

l To add a sibling, click Add Sibling, name the member, and click Submit.

l To add a child, click Add Child, name the member, and click Submit.

l To edit a period, select it, click Edit, rename it and click Submit.

l To reorder a period, select it and click Move Up or Move Down.

l To delete a period, select it, then click Delete.

3 Click OK.

28 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 29: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Managing Custom Attributes

Note: The Managing Custom Attributes feature is only available to administrators.

To categorize information for easier filtering and searching, you can create and assign customattributes to templates, schedules, task types, and tasks. For example, you can filter a task list toinclude only tasks with a specific custom attribute.

You can specify different value types for custom attributes: Date, Date and Time, List, Number,Text, and True/False. For example, you can define a custom attribute named External Auditingwith a value type of True or False. When you assign the External Auditing attribute to an item,you can set it to True for tasks required by external auditors.

If you select the List type, you can define a pick list of values. For example, you can define a Listattribute named Sales Region with North, South, East, and West as the value list.

You can create, edit, and delete custom attributes.

Creating Custom AttributesEach attribute definition consists of a name and value type. If the value type is a List, you definea list of possible values that can be selected.

ä To create an attribute:

1 Select Manage, then Custom Attributes.

2 Click New.

3 In Name, enter a name.

4 From Type, select an option:

l Date

l Date and Time

l List

Managing Custom Attributes 29

Page 30: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

If you select List, click Add and enter values for the attribute.

l Number

If you select Number, select formatting options:

m For Decimal Places, enter a value for the number of decimal places to display. Thedefault value is 0.

m Select Thousands Separator if you want numbers to display a thousands separator(for example, 1,000.00). The system displays the thousands separator symbol forthe end user locale.

m From Currency Symbol, select a currency symbol, for example, Dollars ($), or usethe default value of no currency symbol.

m From Negative Number, select how to display negative numbers, for example, (123).

m From Scale, select a scale value for numbers, for example, 1000.

l Text (255 characters maximum)

l True/False

5 Click OK to save the attribute.

Editing AttributesYou can edit the name of a custom attribute. If the attribute type is a List, you can also add,rename, or delete list values.

ä To edit custom attributes:

1 Select Manage, then Custom Attributes.

2 Select an attribute.

3 Click Edit.

4 Edit the attribute name.

Note: If the attribute is a List type, you can add, rename, or delete list values. After a customattribute is saved, its type cannot be changed.

5 Click OK.

All related templates, schedules, task types, or tasks are updated.

Duplicating AttributesYou can duplicate custom attributes.

ä To duplicate custom attributes:

1 Select Manage, then Custom Attributes.

30 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 31: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

2 Select an attribute(s).

3 Click Duplicate.

4 Click Close.

Deleting AttributesYou can delete attributes that you no longer need. When you delete an attribute, the systemremoves all references to the attribute.

ä To delete custom attributes:

1 Select Manage, then Custom Attributes.

2 Select an attribute(s).

3 Click Delete.

4 At the delete confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Viewing Custom AttributesIn Manage Custom Attributes, you can specify which columns to display for the list of customattributes, or show all. You can also reorder columns, sort columns by ascending or descendingorder, or change the column widths.

ä To display columns:

1 Select Manage, then Custom Attributes.

2 Select View, then Columns:

l To display all columns, select Show All.

l To display specific columns, select or deselect the column names.

ä To reorder columns:

1 Select Manage, then Custom Attributes.

2 Select View, then Reorder Columns.

3 Select columns and use the Up and Down arrows, or drag and drop them, to change the order.

4 Click OK.

ä To sort columns:

1 Select Manage, then Custom Attributes.

2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display, then click Sort Ascending or Sort

Descending .

Managing Custom Attributes 31

Page 32: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To change column widths:

1 Hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display.

2 Drag the columns to the desired width.

Searching for AttributesYou can use the Manage Custom Attributes dialog box to find attributes. You can enter full orpartial names on which to search.

ä To search for attributes:

1 Select Manage, then Custom Attributes.

2 Click the > sign to expand the Search box.

3 Enter full or partial search criteria for the attribute.

4 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains, Starts with, Ends with), click Advanced,and enter search criteria.

Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria.

5 Click Search.

Tip: To reset the list to display all attributes, click Reset.

Managing Alert Types

Subtopics

l Creating Alert Types

l Editing Alert Types

l Viewing Alert Types

l Searching for Alert Types

l Deleting Alert Types

Note: The Managing Alert Types feature is only available to administrators.

During the course of running a close process, users might encounter roadblocks such as ahardware failure, software issues, system failure, and so on. They can create an alert identifyingthe problem, and attach it to the task.

For example, a user is running an AP Period Close process and is unable to log on to the APsystem. The user creates the alert indicating “Software Issue” as the type and assigns it to theSystem Administrator. The System Administrator resolves the login issue, then closes the alertor submits it for approval.

32 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 33: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

You can maintain a list of alert types to categorize alerts.

Creating Alert TypesYou can create alert types to group alerts into categories, such as hardware failure, softwareissues, system failures, and so on.

You can use alert types to classify and filter alerts in the Report Binder. Using alert types, youcan analyze the types of issues that users encounter during the close cycle and make changes toprevent them in future cycles.

ä To create an alert type:

1 Select Manage, then Alert Types.

2 Click New.

3 For Name, enter an alert type name.

4 For Description, enter an alert type description.

5 Click Enabled to enable the alert type.

6 Click OK to save the alert type.

Editing Alert TypesYou can edit the names and descriptions of alert types, and specify whether they are Enabled.

ä To edit an alert type:

1 Select Manage, then Alert Types.

2 Select an alert type to edit.

3 Click Edit.

4 Edit the alert type.

Managing Alert Types 33

Page 34: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

5 Click OK.

Viewing Alert TypesIn Manage Alert Types, you can specify which columns to display for the list of alert types, orshow all. You can also reorder columns, sort columns by ascending or descending order, orchange the column widths.

ä To display columns:

1 Select Manage, then Alert Types.

2 Select View, then Columns, and then select an option:

l To display all columns, select Show All.

l To display specific columns, select or deselect the column names.

ä To reorder columns:

1 Select Manage, then Alert Types.

2 Select View, then Reorder Columns.

3 Select columns and use the Up and Down arrows to change the order.

4 Click OK.

ä To sort columns:

1 Select Manage, then Alert Types.

2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display, then click Sort Ascending or Sort

Descending .

ä To change column widths:

1 Hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display.

2 Drag the columns to the desired width.

Searching for Alert TypesYou can use the Manage Alert Types dialog box to find alert types. You can enter full or partialnames on which to search.

ä To search for alert types:

1 Select Manage, then Alert Types.

2 Click the > sign to expand the Search box.

3 Enter a partial or full name on which to search.

34 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 35: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

4 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains, Starts with, Ends with), click Advanced,and enter search criteria.

Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria.

5 Click Search.

Tip: To reset the list to display all alert types, click Reset.

Deleting Alert TypesYou can delete alert types. When an alert type is deleted, the alert is not deleted, rather it losesits alert type assignment.

ä To delete an alert type:

1 Select Manage, then Alert Types.

2 From Manage Alerts, select the alert type that you want to delete.

3 Click Delete.

4 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Managing Integration Types

Subtopics

l Defining Integration Types

l Creating Integration Types

l Editing Integration Types

l Validating Integration Types

l Importing Integration Types

l Exporting Integration Types

l Deleting Integration Types

l Managing Applications

l Viewing Integration Types

l Searching for Integration Types

Close Manager enables tasks to include integrations with external applications. An IntegrationType is a definition of an end point provided by an external application. Integration Types defineend-use, system-automated tasks, or event monitoring integration.

From the Manage Integration Types dialog, you can view, create, edit, validate, delete, import,or export Integration Types. Additionally, you can maintain a list of applications associated withthe Integration Type. Integration Types must be assigned an application.

An Integration Type requires an execution URL for end-user tasks or an execution Web Servicefor system-automated tasks, and an optional set of parameters. The execution URL launches the

Managing Integration Types 35

Page 36: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

external program, and the parameters pass information required for the task to the externalprogram. For example, the Consolidate Integration Type for Close Manager contains parameterssuch as the Point of View dimension values to run the consolidation. Each Consolidate task inClose Manager is derived from this Consolidate Integration Type with the same set ofparameters.

Integration Types are provided on the Oracle Support Web site for download and you can thenimport them into Close Manager. Experienced consultants can also create custom IntegrationTypes for other Oracle and non-Oracle products through the user interface or with importedXML files. For information, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Close Management IntegrationGuide on the Oracle Technology Network (OTN) Web site.

To manage Integration Types, you must have the Close Administrator role.

Defining Integration TypesWhen you create Integration Types, select one of the these task types:

l End-User task—Tasks that users must perform and validate. The task might be a generictask such as submitting data, or it might require product integration to facilitate or validateits completion.

l System-Automated task—Tasks automatically executed in external applications when theirstart date and time are reached, and their predecessor tasks are completed, for example, anovernight feed from a General Ledger. System-Automated tasks are often executed afterworking hours. They require limited user interaction, and do not have assignees.

l Event Monitoring Integration task—Tasks based on events that occur in externalapplications; for example, Journal Approve.

When you create a task, the type you choose affects the runtime behavior of the task:

l System-Automated, the task runs according to the task parameters that you define.

l End-User, when you click the Go to Task icon, the system uses the execution URL andparameters.

l Event Monitoring, the task waits for an event with a matching parameter value and thencloses.

36 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 37: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating Integration Types

ä To create an Integration Type:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Click New.

Setting Integration Type PropertiesYou can set properties for the Integration Type such as the associated application, and End-User,System-Automated or Event Monitoring tasks.

For an End-User task, you can select the single sign-on (SSO) Parameter option to enable usersto access an external Web application without being prompted for authentication. You can usea SSO parameter for an external application if that application is integrated with the Oracle EPMSystem SSO framework.

ä To set Integration Type properties:

1 From the Properties tab, for Name, enter a name for the Integration Type.

2 Enter an Integration Type Code, for example, HFM_CONS for the Hyperion Financial ManagementConsolidate integration task.

The code is used to execute the Integration Type, and to map updates to an Integration Typefrom a file import.

3 Optional: For Description, enter a description for the integration task.

4 From the Application list, select an application to which the task belongs.

Note: The list of applications can be maintained from the Manage Applications icon in theManage Integration Types dialog box. See “Managing Applications” on page 42.

5 For Execution Type, select an option:

Managing Integration Types 37

Page 38: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l End User Task

End User Endpoint: If you want to enter parameters for an End-User task, the End UserEndpoint should contain those parameters in these formats:

$<Parameter Type Code>$, for example $COLORS$. The system replaces theparameter tokens in the End User Endpoint with the information you specified for thetask parameters.

SSO Parameter (Optional): Specify the name of the SSO parameter for Financial CloseManagement to include when executing the End-User task URL to the externalapplication. If you do not specify a SSO parameter, the system uses the End User URL.

l System Automated Task

Note: If you select System Automated Task, the lower part of the Properties tab displaysconnection information, most of which is required. For detailed information onsetting these parameters, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Close ManagementIntegration Guide on the Oracle Technology Network (OTN) Web site.

l Event Monitoring Task

Note: If you select Event Monitoring Task, the lower part of the Properties tab displaysconnection information, most of which is required. For detailed information onsetting these parameters, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Close ManagementIntegration Guide on the Oracle Technology Network (OTN) Web site.

6 Select the Parameters tab.

Setting Integration Type ParametersIntegration Type parameters enable Close Manager to pass information to the end point todictate and control how the end point should perform its action. For example, when you run aClose Manager consolidation, Close Manager can pass which application to run theconsolidation against, and the dimension selections for the consolidation. The parameter valuesdefined in the Integration Type are set in the task or Task Type using the integration. Thus, theClose Manager Consolidation Integration Type can be used for many applications anddimension selections within Close Manager, depending on how you set the Consolidate taskparameter values.

Each parameter definition requires a name, description, unique code, type, and whether a valueis required. The parameter code is the token that Close Manager replaces in the execution URLfor end-user tasks, or the parameter name that is passed to the execution Web Service for system-automated integration types. Required values must have a value for all tasks in a schedule beforethe schedule can be set to Open.

The parameter type controls the parameter value and how the user enters the value in the taskfield. The supported parameter types are:

38 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 39: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

For detailed information on setting parameters for Integration Types, see the Oracle HyperionFinancial Close Management Integration Guide on the Oracle Technology Network (OTN) Website.

ä To set Integration Type parameters:

1 Select the Parameters tab.

2 Click New.

3 Enter a name for the parameter.

4 Enter a parameter code.

5 Enter a parameter description.

6 From the Parameter Type list, select one of these types and enter additional information needed forthe parameter:

l Checkbox—Boolean value

l Date—Date value

l Document Navigator—Hierarchical set of values, for example, folders and documents

l Dimension Selector—Values for a set of dimensions

l Dynamic List—Dynamic set of text values with values to be determined at runtime

l Integer—Basic numeric value in whole numbers

l Number—Basic numeric value in whole numbers or fractions

l Options Group—Checkbox for a predefined set of values

l Static List—A list of predefined set of text values

l Task Information—Task information, for example, assignee, duration, start and end dates

l Text—Free-form text value.

Note: Event Monitoring Execution Type supports only Text parameter type.

7 If the parameter requires a value, select Required

8 Click OK to save the parameter.

9 Click Save and Close to save the Integration Type.

Editing Integration TypesYou can edit the properties and parameters of an Integration Type. For example, for an End-User type, you can edit the endpoint, change the point of view, or change the list of values.

Note: You cannot edit imported Integration Types; you can only view them.

Managing Integration Types 39

Page 40: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To edit an Integration Type:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Select an Integration Type to edit.

3 Click Edit.

4 Edit the Integration Type.

5 Click Save and Close.

Validating Integration TypesYou can test and validate User Defined, System Automated, or Event Monitoring IntegrationType definitions from the Manage Integration Types module before you create and execute tasks.You can provide parameter values for the parameter definition, and then test those parameters.

l For End-User tasks, the system displays the end result URL Web page.

l For System-Automated tasks, the system executes the asynchronous Web Service anddisplays the results.

l For Event Monitoring tasks, the system waits for the business event to be received. EventMonitoring validation does not take parameters.

The Validation results can contain any or all sections:

l Security Settings—Security settings for this Integration Type; includes the Request andResponse Security Policy and Keystore Alias specified in the application, and the End-UserURL and SSO Parameter of the Integration Type, if it is an End-User Integration Type. Thesesettings are set in the application of the Integration Type.

l Application Tokens—Lists the application-level tokens that exist for the Integration Type.If there are no application-level tokens, this section is not displayed.

l Registry Settings—Displays the values from the installation registry, for example:

m Web Application settings, displayed only if the WebApp setting is defined in theapplication

m Web Service application settings, displayed only if the Web Service application settingis defined in the application

m EPM Workspace settings, displayed only if the End-User URL contains tokenplaceholders for EPM Workspace values

l Parameters—This section is identical to the Parameters tab for tasks and task details, andenables you to provide values for the Integration Type parameters. Task Information typeparameters are also displayed and editable, and parameter errors are displayed. EventMonitoring does not take parameters.

l Results:

m End User-User tasks—Displays the current End-User Endpoint URL with the tokens thatyou specified. Click Refresh to update the URL.

40 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 41: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

m System-Automated tasks—Displays the results of the validation test when it receives themfrom the asynchronous Web service. Click Refresh to update the page and view theresults.

o Validation Status—The status of the validation: Not Validated, Invoking, Waiting forResponse, Success, Error, or Aborted

o Last Validated—The last time you attempted to validate the Integration Type

o Message—The message returned from the Web Service

o Log File Location—The location of the log file, if specified

o Reports—Report URLs

m Event Monitoring tasks—Displays the Validation Status, Last Validated, and Message.

ä To validate an integration type:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Select an Integration Type.

3 Click Validate and choose an Integration Type:

l End-User Integration Type—The system displays the security settings, Application Tokensif applicable, parameters, and results. Click Validate to open the URL in a browserwindow, or open a tab in EPM Workspace, depending on the End-User URL.

l System-Automated Integration Type and Event Monitoring—The system starts theasynchronous Web Service defined in the Integration Type and returns you to theIntegration Type window while the process runs. Click the Refresh icon to see the resultsof the validation.

Tip: When the validation is in the Invoking or Waiting for Response stage, you can clickCancel Validation if you need to cancel the process.

4 When you finish running validations, click Close to return to Manage Integration Types.

Importing Integration TypesThe predefined Integration Types for Oracle products must be imported from XML files beforeyou can access them. During the import process, you can automatically create Task Types forthe Integration Types.

ä To import an Integration Type:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Click Import.

3 Enter a file name, or click Browse to browse for the file to import, and click Next.

4 Select the Integration Types for which you want Task types to be automatically created, and click Next.

The Results screen displays the number of Integration Types imported.

Managing Integration Types 41

Page 42: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

5 Click Close.

Exporting Integration TypesYou can export integration types to an XML file that you can modify and then reimport intoClose Manager.

ä To export an Integration Type:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Click Export.

3 Click Save File, then click OK.

4 Select a location in which to save the file, and click Save.

Deleting Integration TypesYou can delete Integration Types that you no longer need. However, you cannot delete importedIntegration Types, and you cannot delete an Integration Type while it is associated with a TaskType.

ä To delete an Integration Type:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Select an Integration Type to delete.

3 Click Delete.

4 At the delete confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Managing ApplicationsIntegration Types are assigned applications for the external products to which they link. Fromthe Manage Integration Types module, you can maintain a list of applications associated withthe Integration Type. You can search on and sort the list by application. In addition, you canselect to view these additional columns for applications: Created By, Creation Date, Last UpdatedBy, and Last Update Date.

Adding ApplicationsYou can add applications to associate with an Integration Type. You can also specify the securitypolicy to use for an Integration Type of that application. For information on security policies,see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Close Management Integration Guide on the Oracle TechnologyNetwork (OTN) Web site.

In addition, you can specify application-level tokens and values for all Integration Types in anapplication. When you specify an application-level token in an end-user URL or Web service

42 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 43: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

WSDL, the system replaces the token with the value defined for that token in the application.For example, you can specify tokens with values for server and port, and the system automaticallyapplies those values to the Integration Types in the application.

ä To add an application:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Click Manage Applications.

3 Click New.

4 Enter an application name.

5 Optional: Enter additional application properties.

6 Optional: To add an application-level token, in the Application Tokens table, click New. Enter a tokenname and optionally a token value, and then click OK.

Tip: To remove a token, Click Delete.

Editing ApplicationsYou can edit the name of the application, the installation registry properties, the securityinformation, and application-level tokens.

ä To edit an application:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Click Manage Applications.

3 Click Edit.

4 Edit the settings or tokens as needed, and click OK.

Deleting ApplicationsYou can delete applications that you no longer need from the list of available applications. Youcannot delete an application while it is associated with an Integration Type. You must modifythe properties for each Integration Type that references the application before you can deletethe application.

ä To delete an application:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Click Manage Applications.

3 Click Delete.

Managing Integration Types 43

Page 44: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Viewing Integration TypesYou can view the properties and parameters of imported Integration Types. You can specifywhich columns to display for the list of Integration Types, or show all. You can also reordercolumns, sort columns by ascending or descending order, or change the column widths.

ä To display columns:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Select View, then Columns, and select an option:

l To display all columns, select Show All.

l To display specific columns, select or deselect the column names.

ä To reorder columns:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Select View,then Reorder Columns.

3 Select columns and use the Up and Down arrows to change the order.

4 Click OK.

ä To sort columns:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display, then click Sort Ascending or Sort

Descending .

ä To change column widths:

1 Hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display.

2 Drag the columns to the desired width.

Searching for Integration TypesYou can use the Integration Types dialog box to find Integration Types. You can enter full orpartial names on which to search.

ä To search for Integration Types:

1 Select Manage, then Integration Types.

2 Click the > sign to expand the Search box.

3 Enter full or partial search criteria for the Integration Type.

4 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains, Starts with, Ends with), click Advanced,and enter search criteria.

44 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 45: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria.

5 Click Search.

Tip: To reset the list to display all Integration Types, click Reset.

Managing Integration Types 45

Page 46: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

46 Setting Up Close Manager

Page 47: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

4Navigating in Close Manager

In This Chapter

Close Manager Views ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Selecting Views... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Available View Actions... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Displaying Columns in Views ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Navigating in Task Lists.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Filtering Views ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Viewing Task Summary Information ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Task Status ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Close Manager ViewsYou can use the Dashboard, Calendar view, Task List, or Gantt view to track tasks in runningschedules.

When you switch views, for example, from Calendar to Gantt, the system synchronizes the datesso that a new view displays the same date range as a previous view.

By default, the Dashboard is displayed. If you are an Administrator, you can begin system setup.See “Setting Up the System” on page 24.

If you are a User, you can view the My Worklist portlet to view task assignments. See the OracleHyperion Financial Close Management User's Guide.

Close Manager Views 47

Page 48: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Dashboard View

The Dashboard view presents a portal-style interface into the Close Manager application,providing simple, efficient views into running (or Active) schedules and task lists, and high-levelsummary representations into which you can drill down for greater detail. It is used for real timemanagement, not historical review or planning.

The Dashboard provides visibility to only the schedules and tasks that the user has access to view.Users can customize their Dashboard and maximize or minimize dashboard controls calledportlets. For information, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Close Management User's Guide.

My Worklist portlet displays tasks for which you are the assignee or approver and the currentstatus is with you, and alerts for which you are the assignee or approver.

The Schedule Tasks portlet presents information about tasks and issues associated withschedules, enabling you to filter and sort the list into a form most convenient for roles andresponsibilities. By default, the portlet displays tasks of all statuses for all assignees for a specifiedschedule.

The Status Chart portlet provides a graphical representation of the progress of a schedule interms of task status and alert status, with filtering mechanisms for adjusting the scope of the taskset represented by the chart. The portlet is also a launch point into a schedule, bringing up thedashboard in a filtered state, matching the portlet configuration.

The Status Overview portlet presents an overview of a schedule, displaying daily workload andcompletion status.

48 Navigating in Close Manager

Page 49: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Task List View

The Task List view is one of the transactional views, and the Calendar and Gantt. It lists all tasksin a schedule or template. It provides a hierarchical (parent-child) view of tasks. You can filterthe list of tasks to display only the ones in which you are interested.

For example, if you want to quickly and easily see a list of tasks in a hierarchical view and editsome information directly, you can use the Task List view.

By default, the list is sorted by the Starts column. You can click a column heading to sort by thatcolumn. Parent tasks are indicated by an arrow, which you can click to expand or collapse thedisplay of their children.

Calendar View

Calendar views display all schedule or template tasks in traditional calendar format by Month,Week, or Day.

The Month view displays the days in standard calendar format. Tasks occurring on a day aredisplayed as a colored bar in the day, and span the days of the task. If the task spans a week, asmall arrow icon is displayed on the task bar to indicate that the task continues to the next week.

Close Manager Views 49

Page 50: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

The Week view displays the tasks of the specified week. The top section displays tasks that spanmultiple days. The second section displays tasks that are contained within one day. The tasksare displayed vertically, spanning the hours of the day.

The Day view is focused on one 24-hour day.

Parent tasks are not displayed in Calendar views.

For Templates, each of the calendar views displays the dates of the month relative to the zeroday that the template has set for the close process. For example, instead of displaying March 26or 27, the calendar view displays -5 and -4, denoting 5 and 4 days until the zero day.

Gantt View

The Gantt view displays a timeline for a schedule or template that graphically represents theduration of tasks and the dependencies between them. Bars represent duration, and arrowsrepresent dependencies. You can view the predecessor relationships between tasks, for example,Task A must complete before Task B, and view the status of predecessor tasks. You can also seethe parent-child task relationships (aggregations), in the hierarchy, for example, Task A iscomprised of two subtasks, Task B and Task C.

You might choose to use the Gantt view when you create a template to see the predecessorrelationships between the tasks, or to verify the precedence order after adding tasks to a schedule.You can use the Gantt view to see the status of predecessor tasks to other tasks, and see the statusof tasks that are predecessors to other group member tasks.

You can drag new tasks into the Gantt view and update a task using a double-click or menuoption. You can drag a task to a new start date and stretch the task duration. You can filter toflatten the task hierarchy and sort by task status. Tasks that have child tasks are indicated by anarrow, which you can click to expand or collapse the task hierarchies.

50 Navigating in Close Manager

Page 51: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Selecting ViewsYou can select to view tasks from the Dashboard, or one of the transactional views (Calendar,Gantt, or Task List).

If you have created a Close schedule, you can first open the schedule, then select a view.

ä To select a view, perform an action:

l Select View, then select a view.

l From the toolbar, click a button for the view:

m Dashboard

m Calendar - Month

m Calendar - Week

m Calendar - Day

m Gantt

m Task List

Available View ActionsIn the Calendar, Task List, and Gantt views, you can perform these actions:

l Hover over a task—Causes hovertext to display, showing the task name. For the Gantt view,this is available when hovering over the chart task bar and includes the task name.

l Left-click a task—Causes the task to highlight. The Task Panel at the bottom of the screenthen updates to display the task’s information.

l Double-left-click a task—If the task is in a template or in an unopened schedule, the TaskDetails dialog box displays, where you can view and edit the task details. Otherwise, the TaskAction dialog box displays.

l Right-click a task—Pops up a context-sensitive menu that enables you to perform certainactions. The menu contents vary depending on the task status and security role.

l Change View—You can click a button in the toolbar menu to change to one of the other viewtypes.

l Expand/Collapse—Using the plus (+) or minus (-) options, you can expand and collapse thetask hierarchies. (Only in Task List and Gantt views)

l Drag/Drop a Task Type onto the view—Drag a Task Type from the left side panel onto theview to create a new task of that type.

l New Task—Create a new task using the menu or toolbar.

Selecting Views 51

Page 52: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

You can perform these actions in the Gantt and Calendar views:

l Move a Task—You can click and drag a task to move it to a different day or hour.

l Change Duration—You can click and drag the right-side of a task to change its duration andend date.

l Multiple Select—On the Gantt view, you can multi-select tasks and perform actions; forexample, delete.

In the Dashboard, for My Worklist, ScheduleTasks, and Status Chart, you can select one, all, orany number of schedules by multi-selecting.

Displaying Columns in Views

Subtopics

l Selecting Columns

l Reordering Columns

l Sorting Columns

From the Task List or Gantt views, you can specify which columns to display in the view. Youcan also reorder columns, or sort columns by ascending or descending order. From Task Lists,you can use menu options to collapse or expand the list of tasks, and detach the task list table.

Selecting ColumnsYou can specify which columns to display in the view. For example, in Task List views, you candisplay Status, Owner, Start Date, End Date, Duration, and Schedule Name. You can also clickShow More to select custom attributes and other columns.

In addition, in Gantt views, you can display a Path column that indicates a task path to its parent.

You can adjust the width of a column by dragging it. You can also drag columns to change theirposition, for example, you can drag a column to the end so it becomes the last column.

ä To select columns:

1 Click the View toolbar button.

2 From the Task List or Gantt menu bar, select View, then Columns, and select the columns to display.

ä To change column width:

1 Hover over the right side of the column until the icon changes to a double bar indicating that the columnwidth can be adjusted.

2 Drag the right side of the column to resize it.

52 Navigating in Close Manager

Page 53: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Reordering ColumnsIn the Task List and Gantt views, you can reorder columns.

ä To reorder columns:

1 Select View, then select a view, or click the View button on the toolbar.

2 Select View, then Reorder Columns.

3 Select columns and use the Up and Down arrows to reorder.

4 Click OK.

Sorting ColumnsIn the Task List and Gantt views, you can sort columns by ascending or descending order.

ä To sort columns:

1 Select View, then select a view, or click the View toolbar button.

2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display, then click Sort Ascending or Sort

Descending .

Navigating in Task ListsIn the Task List view, you can use menu options to expand and collapse the full or partial list oftasks, or scroll to the first or last task in the list.

ä To navigate the task list:

1 Select View, then select Task List, or from the toolbar, click Task List .

2 Select View, then select an option:

l Expand

l Expand All Below

l Collapse All Below

l Expand All

l Collapse All

l Scroll to First

l Scroll to Last

Navigating in Task Lists 53

Page 54: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Filtering Views

Subtopics

l Saving Filtered Views

l Deleting Filtered Views

You can use filters to define and view a subset of tasks to which you have security access. Youcan filter on various attributes such as Task Type, Active, Assignee, Priority, Owner, Approver,and Status.

A number next to each attribute indicates the number of tasks associated with that attribute. Forexample, if 10 tasks have a Completed status, the Completed attribute in the Status categoryshows (10). For attributes with a large number of values, the system displays the top ten itemssorted in descending order, and displays a “+ more” link that you can click to view more items.Custom attributes that you created are also displayed and selectable.

When you select values of one attribute, the possible choices of other attributes may changedepending on the data. For example, suppose you select Status and Owner attributes. If you filterthe Status attribute to show only the Pending tasks, the Owner attribute displays only ownersof Pending tasks.

Note: You can only filter on attributes that have the Display option enabled. You cannot filteron dynamic fields, for example, numbers.

ä To filter tasks using one attribute:

1 Click Filter Tasks to expand the list of tasks in the left panel.

2 From the Filter Tasks task list, click on an individual task or attribute from a task category.

For example, under Status, you can click Pending.

3 The view changes to display only filtered tasks.

ä To filter tasks using multiple attributes:

1 From the task list on the left pane, choose a method:

l Click the category criteria by which to filter, for example, Task Type.

l Click Select Values, , next to the category.

2 From the Select Filter Items dialog:

l Select All to filter by all items.

l Select items by which to filter.

Note: Some items might be unavailable based on other filter settings.

3 Click OK to refresh the list with the filtered criteria.

54 Navigating in Close Manager

Page 55: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Tip: To remove filter criteria, click the Reset button for attributes to which you apply a filter.

To remove all filter criteria, click Reset Filter, and all tasks are displayed.

Saving Filtered ViewsAfter you define filter criteria, you can save a filter definition for later use, or to use with a differentclose cycle process. From the Filters panel, you can view the list of saved filtered views. The savedfiltered views are visible only to the users who created them.

ä To save the filtered view:

1 After you define filter criteria, click Save Filter.

2 Enter a name for the saved filter, and click Save and Close.

Tip: To view saved filters, select the drop-down list at the top of the Filters panel.

Deleting Filtered ViewsYou can delete filtered views that you no longer need.

ä To delete a filtered view:

1 Select Manage, then Filters.

2 From the list of filtered views, select a filtered view to delete.

3 Click Delete.

4 At the delete confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Viewing Task Summary InformationWhen you select a task in the Calendar, Gantt, and Task List views, you can view summaryinformation from the Task Panel at the bottom of the view pane. Properties, Instructions, andPredecessors are displayed for the selected task.

The Properties pane displays the task name, status, start and end dates, owner, and assignee.

The Instructions pane displays instructions that the administrator has defined for the task.

The Predecessors pane displays Parent Tasks and Child Tasks. The predecessors are displayedin a hierarchy. You can click on a predecessor task to update the panel with the predecessor taskinformation.

Viewing Task Summary Information 55

Page 56: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To view summary information, from a Calendar, Gantt, or Task List view, select a task.

l To expand and collapse the panes, click on the black triangles on either side of the pane bars.

l To resize the panes, hover over the pane, click to grasp a side, and then drag it.

Task Status

Status Icon Description

Pending Task awaiting action; not in progress yet

Open Task is in progress with Assignee or Approver

Closed Task is complete with Success or Warnings

Error Task is complete but with errors

56 Navigating in Close Manager

Page 57: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

5Managing Task Types

In This Chapter

Task Types ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Creating Task Types... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Viewing Task Type History .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Editing Task Types ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Viewing Task Types... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Searching for Task Types ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Importing Task Types ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Exporting Task Types... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Deleting Task Types ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Task TypesTask Types are saved definitions of commonly performed tasks. They identify and categorizetasks commonly performed during a close period, for example, Data Entry or General LedgerExtract. Task Types enable you to set default information, such as settings that must be inputby the user, and questions or instructions that are shared by all tasks of that type. For example,if you have a set of required questions to be answered by users responsible for data loads, youcan create a Data Load Task Type with the required questions. When you create data load tasks,you can select the Data Load Task Type and the questions are automatically included in the tasks.

Two predefined Task Types are installed by default:

l Basic Task: Basic Task Type that does not contain instructions, questions, or attributes.

l Parent Task: Enables you to create parent tasks to define task hierarchies.

To create and manage Task Types, you must be assigned the Close Administrator or Power Usersecurity role. Power Users can create their own Task Types, but can only view those of others.

Task Types 57

Page 58: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating Task Types

Subtopics

l Setting Task Type Properties

l Setting Task Type Parameters

l Specifying Task Type Instructions

l Applying Task Type Attributes

l Specifying Task Type Questions

Task Types enable you to set default information for a task, such as settings that need to be inputby the user, or questions or instructions that are shared by all tasks of that type.

ä To create a Task Type:

1 From the menu, use one of these methods:

l Highlight a task, select Tools, then Create Task Type to create a Task Type based on thattask.

l Select Manage, and then Task Types. Click New.

2 Select the Properties tab if it is not displayed.

Setting Task Type PropertiesThe Properties tab enables you to set the name, ID, and description, and associate an IntegrationType. If you select a System-Automated Integration Type, you can specify a user known as theRun As ID under which tasks of this type are run, unless overridden.

For End User Types, you can allow an assignee to open a pending task prior to the scheduledtime, if all task predecessor conditions have been met.

58 Managing Task Types

Page 59: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To set Task Type properties:

1 Create a new Task Type.

The Properties tab is displayed by default.

2 Enter a name for the Task Type.

3 Enter a Task Type ID that can be used to identify the Task Type.

4 Enter a Task Type description.

5 To specify an Integration Type, click Browse to search for and select an Integration Type, then clickOK. Selecting an Integration Type enables the Task Type to inherit the parameters from that IntegrationType.

6 If you selected a System-Automated Integration Type, the Run As box displays. Click the Select Run AsAccount icon, search for and select a user under which tasks of this type are run, and click OK.

7 Optional: For an End-User Type, select Allow Early Start to allow the assignee to open the task beforethe scheduled start time.

Setting Task Type ParametersThe Parameters tab enables you to set the parameters for the Task Type.

Note: The Parameters tab is available only if you have selected an Integration Type that hasparameters that must be defined. Parameter values can be set at the Task Type level or atthe task level.

Some tasks contain parameters that need to be changed each time that they are applied to aschedule. For example, date-driven parameters for Data Entry tasks may need to be set to thecurrent month each time they are added to a schedule. When you set Task Type parameters, youcan specify which parameters can be overridden during the scheduling process.

ä To set Task Type parameters:

1 From the New Task Type dialog, select the Parameters tab.

2 Enter parameter values as required.

3 Optional: To enable the parameter to be overridden at scheduling time, select Override at scheduling.

Specifying Task Type InstructionsYou can create a set of instructions for completing tasks. You can also add references to repositorydocuments, files, or URLs to Web sites. For example, you can attach a policy document as areference, or a link to a product instruction guide.

ä To specify instructions:

1 Select the Instructions tab.

Creating Task Types 59

Page 60: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

2 In Instructions, enter instruction text.

ä To add a reference:

1 In the References section, click Add.

2 From the Type list, select one of these types:

l Local File

Enter a name, click Browse to select and attach the file, and click OK.

l URL

Enter a URL name, then enter the URL, for example: Oracle, http://www.oracle.com,and click OK.

l Optional: Repository File

From the file list, select the file, and click OK.

Note: The Repository File option is only displayed if Financial Close Management isconfigured with Oracle Enterprise Content Management.

Tip: To delete a reference, select the reference, and click Delete.

Applying Task Type AttributesTo locate Task Types in the system, you can apply custom attributes to the Task Type. Whenyou select an attribute, you can set a value for the attribute based on the attribute type. You canlater filter by the attribute value.

For example, you may have a List attribute named Sales Region with the values of North, South,East, and West. The current Task Type applies only to the West Sales Region, so you can addthe Sales Region attribute and set it to “West.”

ä To apply an attribute:

1 From the Attributes tab, click Add.

2 From the Attribute list, select an attribute.

3 For Value, depending on the attribute, select a value for the attribute from a drop-down list, or enter avalue.

4 Optional: Select Display To User if you want the attribute to display on the Task Action and the ReportBinder Task page.

5 Optional: From the Updatable by list, select an option that determines which user role can update theattribute value.

6 Optional: Select Required if the attribute value is required.

If the attribute is updatable and required:

60 Managing Task Types

Page 61: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l By the assignee, the assignee must enter a value prior to submitting the task to theapprover

l By the approver, the attribute value must be set prior to the approver approving thetask.

l By multiple approvers, the first approver must have the attribute value set. Subsequentapprovers can update the attribute. The assignee can submit the task with the attributevalue blank.

7 Click OK.

Specifying Task Type QuestionsYou can specify Task Type questions that apply to all tasks with that Task Type.

Note: The Questions tab is not available for a Task Type that uses an automated IntegrationType.

ä To specify questions:

1 Select the Questions tab.

2 Click New.

3 From the New Question dialog box, for Question, enter the text for the question.

4 From the Type list, select one of these question types:

l Date and Time

l List

If you select List, enter a list of valid responses to the question.

l Number

If you select Number, select number formatting options:

m For Decimal Places, enter a value for the number of decimal places to display.

m Select the Thousands Separator option if you want numbers to display a thousandsseparator (for example, 1,000.00)

m From the Currency Symbol list, select a currency symbol, for example, Dollars ($).

m From the Negative Number list, select how to display negative numbers, forexample, (123).

m From the Scale list, select a scale value for numbers, for example, 1000.

l Text

l True/False

l Yes/No

5 If the question is required, select Required.

Creating Task Types 61

Page 62: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

6 Click OK to save the question.

7 Optional: To change the order of questions, select a question, then click Move to Top, Move Up, MoveDown, or Move to Bottom.

Tip: To edit a question, select the question and click Edit. To remove a question, select thequestion and click Delete.

8 Click Save and Close to save the Task Type.

Viewing Task Type HistoryThe system maintains a history of Task Type actions, which you can view from the Manage TaskTypes dialog box. The History tab displays the components that were updated, the modificationtype, the old and new values, the user who made the modification, and the change date. Theinformation on the History tab is read-only and cannot be changed.

ä To view Task Type history:

1 Select Manage, then Task Types.

2 Select a Task Type.

3 Click Edit.

4 Select the History tab.

5 When you finish, click Save and Close or Cancel.

Editing Task TypesFrom the Manage Task Types dialog box, you can edit Task Types. For example, you can addor delete attributes, edit parameters, add or delete questions, edit instructions, or change theorder of questions.

Editing Task Types may have an effect on tasks that are created from the Task Type. For tasksin a template, the effect is immediate. Changes to the Task Type (instructions, questions, andso on), are automatically updated in tasks of that type. There is no effect if you edit a Task Typein a schedule.

ä To edit a Task Type:

1 Select Manage, then Task Types.

2 Select the Task Type that you want to edit.

3 Use one of these methods:

l Select Actions, and then Edit.

l Click the Edit icon.

l Right-click and select Edit.

62 Managing Task Types

Page 63: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

4 Select the tab for the information you want to edit and edit the Task Type.

5 Click Save and Close.

Viewing Task TypesIn Manage Task Types, you can specify columns to display for the list of Task Types, or showall. You can reorder columns, sort columns by ascending or descending order, or change thecolumn widths.

ä To display columns:

1 Select Manage, then Task Types.

2 Select View, then Columns, and select an option:

l To display all columns, select Show All.

l To display specific columns, select or deselect the column names.

ä To reorder columns:

1 Select Manage, then Task Types.

2 Select View, then Reorder Columns.

3 Select columns and use the Up and Down arrows to reorder.

4 Click OK.

ä To sort columns:

1 Select Manage, then Task Types.

2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display, then click Sort Ascending or Sort

Descending .

ä To change column widths:

1 Hover over the column header dividers until the double bars display.

2 Drag the columns to the desired width.

Searching for Task TypesYou can use the Task Types dialog box to find Task Types. You can enter full or partial nameson which to search.

ä To search for Task Types:

1 Select Manage, then Task Types.

2 Click the > sign to expand the Search box.

Viewing Task Types 63

Page 64: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 Enter full or partial search criteria for the Task Type.

4 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains, Starts with, Ends with), click Advanced,and enter search criteria.

Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria.

5 Click Search.

Tip: To reset the list to display all Task Types, click Reset.

Importing Task TypesYou can import Task Types or partial Task Type information from text files. The process issimilar to importing tasks into a template.

You can select the Replace option to completely replace the definition of a Task Type with thedefinition in the import file. This option replaces all Task Type detail with the information thatis in the file that you are importing. It does not affect Task Types that are not specified in theimport file.

You can select the Update option to update partial information for Task Types. This option isnot a full replacement of the Task Type details. Only details for the Task Type properties specifiedin the file are updated.

For details on the file format, see “Task Import File Format” on page 74.

To import Task Types, you must have the Close Administrator or Close Power User securityrole.

ä To import Task Types:

1 From Manage Task Types, click Import.

2 Enter the name of the file to import, or click Browse to find the file.

3 Select an import option:

l Replace

l Update

The system displays a warning that task types matching a task type ID in the import file willbe modified. If you do not want to overwrite the task type, click Cancel.

4 Click Import.

Exporting Task TypesYou can export Task Types to a comma-separated values (CSV) file, which can be read by Excel,then modify and reimport the file into Close Manager.

64 Managing Task Types

Page 65: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To export Task Types:

1 From Manage Task Types, select a Task Type, then click Export.

2 Click Save File, and then OK.

3 Select a location in which to save the file, and click Save.

Deleting Task TypesYou can delete Task Types that you no longer need. To delete a Task Type, you must have CloseAdministrator or Power User security rights.

Note: You cannot delete a Task Type if tasks belong to it.

ä To delete a Task Type:

1 From Manage Task Types, select the Task Type that you want to delete.

2 Use one of these methods:

l Select Actions, and then Delete.

l Click the Delete icon.

l Right-click and select Delete.

3 At the delete confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Deleting Task Types 65

Page 66: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

66 Managing Task Types

Page 67: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

6Managing Templates

In This Chapter

Creating Templates ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Opening Templates ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Adding Tasks to Templates... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Editing Templates ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Importing Tasks into Templates... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Task Import File Format .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Exporting Tasks to Microsoft Excel.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Reassigning Users .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Creating Schedules from Templates... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Manually Validating Templates ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Viewing Templates ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Searching for Templates... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Deleting Templates ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

A template defines a repeatable set of tasks required for a close period. It is used as a basis forcreating schedules. You can create templates for different types of close periods, such as monthlyor quarterly. You use templates to generate schedules for specific close periods.

Template tasks are not assigned to specific days on a calendar, but are defined using generic days,for example, day-3, day-2, day-1, day 0, based on close process activities. You apply the task flowdefined in the template to calendar dates when you create schedules.

If you are a Close Administrator or Power User, you can create, edit, and delete templates.

67

Page 68: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating Templates

Subtopics

l Setting Template Properties

l Specifying Template Instructions

l Assigning Viewers

l Applying Template Attributes

l Specifying Day Labels

l Embedding Templates

l Viewing Template History

You can create templates for specific tasks, such as a Quarterly template to encompass all tasksinvolved in a quarterly close. You might further define separate templates for a HeadquartersQuarterly Close and a Regional Quarterly Close.

When you create a template, you can assign users or groups as viewers. A Power User viewercan view the template details and template tasks as read-only. A Close User viewer has notemplate access, and only read-only access to schedules produced from the template.

ä To create a template:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Click New.

Setting Template PropertiesThe Properties tab enables you to specify the template name, description, owner, and time span.

You must assign a template owner to every template, which must be a Close Administrator orPower User. The current ID is the default owner. The template owner is also the default ownerof all tasks in the template unless overridden at the task level.

Tasks in a template are organized by numeric template days. Each template has a Day Zero,which is usually the day the company closes its books. You can specify the number of days atemplate tracks before and after the Zero day. Days before Day Zero are represented as Day-5,Day-4, and so on. Days after Day Zero are represented as Day 3, Day 4, and so on. A templatehas at least one day (Day Zero), even if you do not specify days before or after it.

ä To set template properties:

1 Create a template and select the Properties tab.

2 Enter a name for the template.

3 Enter a template description.

4 Enter the time span for the template.

l For Number of Days Before Day 0, select a number.

l For Number of Days After Day 0, select a number.

68 Managing Templates

Page 69: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

5 For Owner, use the default owner or click Select Owner and select a user.

Specifying Template InstructionsYou can specify instructions in the template for completing the close process. Users can viewthe instructions from tasks in the template. The instructions are also transferred to each schedule.

You may also want to supply additional detail to help users understand the purpose of thetemplate and how to complete the tasks. You can attach additional references.

ä To specify template instructions:

1 From the New Template dialog, select the Instructions tab.

2 In Instructions, enter instruction text for each task in the template to include.

3 Click OK.

ä To add a reference:

1 In the References section, click Add.

2 From the Type list, select one of these types:

l Local File

Enter a name, click Browse to select and attach the file, and click OK.

l URL

Enter a URL name, then enter the URL, for example: Oracle, http://www.oracle.com.and click OK.

l Optional: Repository File

From the file list, select the file, and click OK.

Note: The Repository File option is only displayed if Financial Close Management isconfigured with Oracle Enterprise Content Management.

Assigning ViewersThe Viewers tab enables you to assign viewer rights to users who may view tasks in the scheduleand schedule tasks that are generated from the template. You can assign multiple users to atemplate as viewers. Viewers can be a group assignment. A Power User viewer can view thetemplate details and template tasks as read-only. A Close User viewer has no template access,and only read-only access to schedules produced from the template.

ä To assign viewer rights:

1 From the New Template dialog, select the Viewers tab.

2 Click Add.

Creating Templates 69

Page 70: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 To search by users or groups, click Search Users, then select Users or Groups.

4 Enter a full or partial user name, then click Search.

5 To specifically identify a user, click Advanced, then enter a User ID, Email address, or Description.

6 From the Search Results list, select IDs, then move them to the Selected box.

7 For additional details about the user, such as groups and roles, click Details.

8 Click Add or Add All to move users to the Selected list.

Tip: To remove users, select them and click Remove or Remove All.

Applying Template AttributesTo locate templates in the system, you can apply custom attributes to the template. When youselect an attribute, you can set a value for the attribute based on the attribute type. You can laterfilter by the attribute value.

For example, you may have a List attribute named Sales Region with the values of North, South,East, and West. The current template applies only to the West Sales Region, so you can add theSales Region attribute and set it to “West.”

ä To apply an attribute:

1 From the New Template dialog, select the Attributes tab.

2 Click Add.

3 From the Attribute list, select an attribute.

4 Optional: Select Display To User if you want the attribute to display on the Task Action and the ReportBinder Task page.

5 For Value, depending on the attribute, select a value for the attribute from a drop-down list, or enter avalue.

6 Click OK.

Specifying Day LabelsYou can customize the names of days in the template. For example, you can rename Day 2 toData Entry Day. Editing the name of the day does not change its sequential order.

ä To specify day labels:

1 From the New Template dialog, select the Day Labels tab.

2 Select a day to rename.

3 Rename the day from its default value to a custom name.

70 Managing Templates

Page 71: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Embedding TemplatesYou can reuse tasks from one template in another by embedding a template into anothertemplate. When you schedule tasks for a template, tasks for embedded templates are alsoscheduled.

For example, the Quarterly close process may be the same as the Monthly close process withsome additional quarterly-only tasks. Instead of copying the Monthly template, you can specifythat the Quarterly template embeds the Monthly template so if you change the Monthly template,you do not need to update the Quarterly. When you generate a schedule from the Quarterlytemplate, the schedule includes the tasks from the Monthly template.

Note: Only one level of embedding is possible. For example, if Template A is embedded inTemplate B, then Template B cannot be embedded in another template.

ä To embed templates:

1 From the Create Template dialog, select the Embedded Templates tab.

2 From the Available Templates list, select a template to embed.

3 Click Move to move the template to the Embedded Templates list.

Tip: To remove a template or templates, select the template from the Embedded Templateslist and click Remove or Remove All to move it to the Available Templates list.

4 Click OK to save the template.

Viewing Template HistoryThe system maintains a history of template actions, which you can view from the Templatedialog box. The History tab displays the components that were created or updated, themodification type, the old and new values, the user who made the modification, and the changedate. The information on the History tab is read-only.

ä To view template history:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Select a template for which to view history.

3 Click Edit.

4 Select the History tab.

5 When you finish, click OK.

Opening TemplatesYou can open templates from the Manage Templates dialog box.

Opening Templates 71

Page 72: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To open a template:

1 From Manage Templates, select a template.

2 Use one of these methods:

l Select Actions, and then Open.

l Click the Open icon.

l Right-click and select Open.

Adding Tasks to TemplatesYou can add tasks to templates. Each task has a start date and time. End-User tasks also have anend date and time, and System-Automated tasks have a duration when added to a template. Thestart day in a template corresponds to template days, rather than to calendar days.

Note: For detailed information on creating tasks, see “Creating Tasks” on page 84.

ä To add a task to a template:

1 Open an application and select Manage, then Templates.

2 Select and open a template.

3 Add tasks as required.

Editing TemplatesYou can edit templates to change the properties, such as the name of a template and the numberof days before and after Day Zero. If you reduce the number of days before or after the Day Zero,tasks associated with those days are removed. Editing a template has no effect on schedulespreviously generated from that template.

You can edit, copy, and delete tasks in a template. See “Editing Tasks” on page 91.

You must be working in the source template to edit tasks from embedded templates.

ä To edit a template:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Select the template that you want to edit.

3 Use one of these methods:

l Select Actions, and then Edit.

l Click the Edit icon.

l Right-click and select Edit.

4 Edit the template properties.

72 Managing Templates

Page 73: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

5 Click OK.

Importing Tasks into TemplatesYou can import tasks, or partial task data, from text files such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet,into a template. For example, you can enter task definitions as rows in Excel, save the file as acomma-separated values (CSV) file, and then import it into a Close Manager template. You canalso use the Import feature to quickly add many repetitive tasks by editing the fields in a text fileand importing it, rather than creating individual tasks.

Note: Before you import tasks into a template, you must specify task IDs that are unique in thetemplate to ensure that no two tasks have the same ID.

For details on the file format, see “Task Import File Format” on page 74.

To import tasks, you must have security rights to edit the template.

Three options are available for importing tasks into a template:

l Replace

l Replace All

l Update

Replace

Replaces the definition of a task with the definition in the import file. This option replaces thetask detail with the detail that is in the file that you are importing. It does not affect other tasksin the template that are not specified in the import file.

Replace All

Imports a new set of tasks that replaces the tasks in a template. This option is useful when youwant to replace a template in one system with an updated definition from another system. Tasksthat are not specified in the import file are deleted from the template.

Update

Updates partial information for tasks. For example, in the import file, you might have madechanges to task instructions, reassigned owners, assignees, and approvers, or removed somecustom attributes and added new attributes. You might also have made the same change to alarge number of tasks, for example, adding a new attribute to 100 of 400 tasks. The update optionis not a full replacement of the task details. Only details for the task properties specified in thefile are updated. For example, if the import file has only a column for a task instructions, thetask name, assignee, custom attributes, and other properties are not affected.

ä To import tasks into a template:

1 From Manage Templates, select a template into which to import tasks.

2 Click Import Tasks.

Importing Tasks into Templates 73

Page 74: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 Enter the name of the file to import, or click Browse to find the file.

4 Select an import option:

l Replace

l Replace All

l Update

Note: The system displays a warning that tasks in the template that match a task ID in theimport file will be modified. If you do not want to overwrite the task, click Cancel tocancel the import process.

5 Click Import.

l If the import is successful, the “Import Success” dialog box is displayed, indicating that thetemplate name, the name of the file containing the tasks, and the total number of tasksimported. Click OK.

l If errors are found, the import process is not run, and the “Import Errors” dialog box displayserrors. View the errors, then click OK to return to Manage Templates.

Task Import File FormatThe task import file enables you to specify the task information that you want to import into atemplate. The first row contains only the column headings that identify the data in that column,for example, TaskName. Separate rows are used to define each task.

Each task in the file must be given a unique ID in the TaskID column. You use the numeric IDsto uniquely identify predecessors and parent tasks. For example, when you enter a parent taskin the Parent column, you enter the numeric ID of the task rather than the task name.

When you use the Replace or Replace All options, you can add, remove, and shift the columnsbut you cannot remove required columns. When you use the Update option, there are norequired columns except TaskID, or TaskTypeID when you are importing Task Types. The datain each column must match the column ID in the first row.

Many column IDs may have an indeterminate amount of values. For example, a task may havemany viewers. You can add parameters by modifying the ending number, for example, Viewer4,Viewer5, and so on.

The numbers that you append to the column IDs for Approvers, Questions, or References onlyrepresent the relative order with the other approvers, questions, or references. When you updatethese, the system matches by the name of the approver, question, or reference without regardto the number in the file format column. To replace question text, approvers, or reference names,you must use Replace mode. When you select Update mode, the system only adds a new question,approver, or reference if the file names do not match.

All Text Lookup rows in the file must match values stored in Close Manager. For example, ifyou are importing Task Types, you must have specified values for them when you set up CloseManager. For groups of column headings, if you have a certain number of one of the group, you

74 Managing Templates

Page 75: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

must have the same number for other members. For example, if you have QText5, there mustbe a corresponding QType5.

Column ID Description Type

TaskID ID of task. Maximum of 80 characters. Text

TaskName Name of task Text

TaskType Task Type Text Lookup

Description Full description of task. Maximum of 1000 characters. Text

Priority Task priority (High, Medium, Low) Text Lookup

StartDate Start date, in template days (for example, -5, 0, 1, 12)

For schedules, the start date must be a calendar date in the locale format.

Integer

StartTime Start time in HH:MM (24-hour), for example: 13:00 Integer

EndDate User tasks only, in template days (for example, -5, 0, 1, 12)

For schedules, the end date must be a calendar date in the locale format.

Integer

EndTime User tasks only, in HH:MM (24-hour), for example, 13:00 Integer

Duration Task duration in minutes (automated tasks only) Number

Owner Task owner Text Lookup

Assignee Task assignee (user tasks only) Text Lookup

Active Whether the task is active. Only applies to template import. Boolean

StartEarly Whether the assignee is allowed to open a pending task prior to the scheduled start time Boolean

RunAs RunAs user name. Only applicable for system-automated tasks. Text Lookup

Instruction Instruction text. Maximum of 2 GB. Text

Reference# Instruction reference (URL and Content Server references) URL

RefText# Reference name, for URL references Text

RefType# Reference type (URL, Document) Text Lookup

RefURL# Reference URL, for URL references URL

RefDocId# Reference document ID, for document references Integer

Approver# Approver Level User Name

Viewer# Task viewer User Name

QText# Required for question. Text of question. Maximum of 255 characters. Text

QType# Required for question. Data type of question (Text, Member, True/False, and so on) Text Lookup

Task Import File Format 75

Page 76: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Column ID Description Type

QReq# Required for question. Question required? (YES/NO) Boolean

QList# List of values for question, separated by | symbol, for example, Red|Green|Blue|Yellow. Text Lookup

QCurrSymbol# Currency format for question X Text

QDecPlaces# Number of significant digits after the decimal places for question X Number

QNegNumFmt# Negative number format for question X Text: - or ( )

QScale# Scale format for question X Number, in magnitude:1000 and so on

QThouSep# Thousand separator indicator for question X Boolean

Attribute# Attribute name, for example, Color Text Lookup

AttrVal# Attribute value, for example, Red. Maximum of 255 characters. Text

AttrDisplay Display to user (in task action dialog) for attribute Boolean

Param# Parameter name Text Lookup

ParmVal# Parameter value Text

Parent Task ID of the task parent Task ID

Predecessor# Predecessor task ID (from column A) Task ID

PredType# Required. Predecessor type (for example, Finish to Start). Text Lookup

PredTemplate# Name of the predecessor template or schedule, if the predecessor belongs to a differenttemplate or schedule

Text

When you import Task Types, these columns are used:

l TaskTypeID

l IntegrationType

l ParamOverride# - whether the parameter should be overridden

A sample task import file is provided. It contains these dynamic parameters, which you canmodify:

l Two questions

l Two attributes

l Two instructional references

l Three predecessor tasks

l Three approver levels

76 Managing Templates

Page 77: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Exporting Tasks to Microsoft ExcelYou can export tasks from a template to a flat file in CSV format, then use Microsoft Excel tomodify the file. For example, you can export the tasks from a template in a test installation andimport them to a template in a production installation. When you export tasks from a template,they are saved to a CSV file.

ä To export tasks:

1 From Manage Templates, select a template from which to export tasks.

2 Click Export Tasks.

3 Click Save File, then click OK.

4 Select a location in which to save the file, and click Save.

Reassigning UsersYou may periodically need to reassign users to different tasks. For example, you may create atemplate and assign a user to certain tasks; however, later that employee leaves the company andanother employee assumes those tasks. You can use the Reassign feature in the ManageTemplates dialog box to automatically change assignments instead of manually searching for,opening, and editing individual tasks. The Reassign feature enables you to quickly find the tasksassociated with one user and reassign them to another.

You can select the roles for which to reassign users. For example, if you select the Owner role,the system reassigns the user only in tasks in which the user was assigned as the owner.

ä To reassign users:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Select the template in which you want to reassign users.

3 Select Actions, and then Reassign User.

4 For Find User, click Find User and enter search criteria for the user that you want to replace.

5 From the Select User dialog, enter the first or last name for the user, and click Search.

6 Select the user from the results, then click OK.

7 For Replace with, click Find User and enter search criteria for the user to whom you want to reassigntasks.

8 From the Select User dialog, enter the first or last name for the user, and click Search.

9 Select the user from the results, then click OK.

10 Select roles for the user that must be reassigned:

l Owner

l Assignee

l Approver

Exporting Tasks to Microsoft Excel 77

Page 78: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Viewer

11 Click Reassign.

When the process ends, the system displays a “Reassign Users - Success” message thatindicates that the user reassignment is complete, and displays the template name and totalnumber of user reassignments made.

Creating Schedules from TemplatesYou can create schedules from templates. Creating a schedule from a template populates theschedule with the tasks in the template. If the source template has embedded templates, the tasksin the embedded templates are included. Template instructions, viewers, and attributes are alsoadded to the schedule.

You create schedules from templates from the Manage Templates dialog box. The Last Schedulecolumn shows the last schedule created from each template. The Schedules column shows thetotal number of schedules created from each template.

To create a schedule from a template, you must have the Close Administrator or Power Userrole.

The schedule starts in a Pending status, which gives you the opportunity to make final changesin the definition.

When template tasks are added from a template to a schedule, they are assigned calendar datesbased on their relationship to the template Day Zero. The dates can also account for non-workingdays of the schedule if you specified them. For example, if Day 0 is a Friday, the tasks for Day 1are placed on the following Monday if you selected to exclude weekend days. The Date Mapdisplays the default calendar date assigned to each template day. You can use the Date Mapfeature to adjust the date assignments.

A task in one template can have predecessor tasks in other templates. When you create a schedulefrom a template, you can select predecessor tasks in schedules as predecessors for tasks withpredecessors in other templates. You use the Predecessor Task Links tab to select predecessortasks in schedules. The Predecessor Task Links tab lists all tasks with predecessors in othertemplates, and enables you to select a predecessor in a schedule for these tasks.

When you create a schedule from a template, you can globally update the task parameters for aTask Type if the parameters have the override option enabled.

For more information on schedules, see Chapter 8, “Managing Schedules”.

ä To create a schedule from a template:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Select the template that you want to schedule.

3 If the template was successfully validated, create the schedule:

a. Click Create Schedule.

b. In Name, enter a schedule name.

78 Managing Templates

Page 79: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

c. From the Year list, select a schedule year.

d. From the Period list, select a close period for the schedule.

e. From the Day Zero Date list, select the calendar date to assign to the template Day Zero.

f. Select whether to include or exclude weekend days.

g. Click Date Map and for each template day whose date assignment you want to modify,in the Date column, enter the new date.

h. Optional: Select the Predecessor Task Links tab, select the schedule that contains thepredecessor task and in the Assigned Task list, select the predecessor task.

i. Optional: Select the Override Parameters tab, review the parameters, and for eachparameter that you want to modify, in the New Value column, enter a new value.

Note: This Override Parameters tab displays only tasks that use a Task Type in whichat least one parameter has the Override option enabled. See “Setting Task TypeParameters” on page 59.

j. Click Create Schedule.

A schedule is created and populated with the tasks, instructions and viewers from thetemplate. It has a status of Pending. By default the schedule is opened into a view whencreated.

k. Review the schedule and make adjustments as needed.

Manually Validating TemplatesWhen you generate a schedule from a template, the system automatically validates the templatefirst to check for uniqueness violations, tasks that directly or indirectly depend on each other,or a date-precedence mismatch. For example, you cannot have circular predecessors.

You can manually validate a template. Validation is particularly useful to check for problemsafter you import tasks into a template from a file. If the template has an error, you can use thenavigation links in the validation results to navigate to the source of the error.

ä To manually validate a template:

1 From Manage Templates, select the template that you want to validate.

2 Click Validate.

l If no errors exist, the system displays a “Template valid” message.

l If an error is displayed, click the link to the error.

Manually Validating Templates 79

Page 80: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Viewing TemplatesIn the Manage Templates dialog, you can specify which columns to display for the list oftemplates, or show all. You can also reorder columns, sort columns by ascending or descendingorder, or change the column widths.

ä To display columns:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Select View, then Columns, and select an option:

l To display all columns, select Show All.

l To display specific columns, select or deselect the column names.

ä To reorder columns:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Select View, then Reorder Columns.

3 Select columns and use the Up and Down arrows to change the order.

4 Click OK.

ä To sort columns:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display, then click Sort Ascending or Sort

Descending .

ä To change column widths:

1 Hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display.

2 Drag the columns to the desired width.

Searching for TemplatesYou can use the Manage Templates dialog box to quickly find templates. You can enter full orpartial names on which to search.

ä To search for templates:

1 Select Manage, then Templates.

2 Click the > sign to expand the Search box.

3 Enter full or partial search criteria.

4 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains, Starts with, Ends with), click Advanced,and enter search criteria.

80 Managing Templates

Page 81: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria.

5 Click Search.

Tip: To reset the list to display all templates, click Reset.

Deleting TemplatesYou can delete templates that you no longer need. To delete a template, you must have securityrights to the template.

Deleting a template removes it from the list of available templates and removes tasks associatedwith it. It does not directly affect a running schedule, however some reporting and dashboardmetrics may use the template to link various schedule runs together, which are not possible ifthe template is deleted.

ä To delete a template:

1 From Manage Templates, select the template that you want to delete.

2 Click Delete.

3 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Deleting Templates 81

Page 82: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

82 Managing Templates

Page 83: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

7Managing Tasks

In This Chapter

Creating Tasks... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Editing Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Sorting Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Searching for Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Moving Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Deleting Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Tasks are the core units of action in a close process, such as data entry or data consolidation.

l End-user tasks require actions by Close Manager end users, such as answering questions orapproving. They may contain product integrations, for example, a link to a data entry screen.

l System-automated tasks run without user intervention, such as an overnight feed from ageneral ledger. The success or failure of the task process is displayed in the task detail.

l Event monitoring tasks are tasks which allow Close Manager to monitor processes withinexternal applications.

Each task has different parameters depending on the Task Type. If you have Close Administratoror Power User security rights, you can create, edit, or delete tasks.

83

Page 84: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating Tasks

Subtopics

l Setting Task Properties

l Setting Task Parameters

l Specifying Children

l Specifying Task Instructions

l Adding Task Questions

l Setting Task Access

l Setting Task Predecessors

l Applying Task Attributes

l Viewing Task History

You can add tasks to templates or schedules. If you create a task in a template, you assign thestart and end date as days before or after Day Zero. If you create a task in a schedule, you selectcalendar dates for the start and end dates.

You can group tasks under parent tasks to provide a simpler view of the close process. Afterviewing upper-level parent tasks, you can then drill into the underlying tasks. Child tasks ofparent tasks may have different owners than the parent task.

You can create a task using any of these methods:

l Click New, then Task.

l Drag and drop the Task Type onto a template or schedule in a view.

l Right-click on a task and select New.

l Right-click on a day/date and select New.

Setting Task PropertiesThe Properties tab enables you to set the task name, task ID, description, task type, priority, startand end date or duration.

You also use the Properties tab to specify task owners and assignees. During the close cycle, ifan owner or assignee is not available to work on the task (due to sick time, vacation, has left thecompany, or is simply too busy), you can reassign users associated with a task, template, orschedule. Template, schedule, and task owners, assignees, and approvers may also reassign theirtasks.

For end-user tasks, you can allow an assignee to open a pending task prior to the scheduled time,if all task predecessor conditions have been met.

Automated tasks have no assignees, however you can specify Run As IDs for users under whichtasks of that type are run.

Event Monitoring tasks have no assignees and Run as IDs.

84 Managing Tasks

Page 85: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To set task properties:

1 Create a task and select the Properties tab.

2 Enter a task name (required).

3 Enter a task ID that can be used to identify the task (required). Task IDs must be unique within thetemplate or schedule.

4 Enter a task description.

5 For Event Monitoring tasks, enter the Source.

6 For Task Type, click Browse and select a Task Type (required).

7 From the Priority list, select a priority for the task:

l High

l Medium

l Low

8 Select a Start date, then select the time of day for the task to start.

9 Perform one of these actions:

l End-User task: Select an End date, then select the time of day for the task to end.

l System-Automated task: Select the Duration (days, hours, minutes). Automated taskshave no End date.

l Event-Monitoring task: Select an End date, then select the time of day for the task to end.

10 Optional: For Minimum Duration, enter the minimum duration of a task in the form of Days, Hours, andMinutes. An At Risk criteria is based on the condition if the Start date was missed AND (the End_dateminus the Current_date is less than the minimum task duration OR the End_Date minus the Start_Dateis less than the minimum duration). The At Risk tasks display in the Needs Attention Graph in the StatusChart of the Dashboard.

11 Optional: For an End-User task, select Allow Early Start to allow the assignee to open the task beforethe scheduled start time.

12 For Owner, click Select Owner to find a user.

Note: The owner must be an individual user, not a group. If you do not select a user, theowner defaults to the current user.

13 Perform one of these actions:

l For an End-User task, for Assignee, click Select Assignee to find a user.

Note: The assignee must be an individual user, not a group. If you do not select a user,the owner becomes the default assignee. Parent and automated tasks have noassignees.

l For a System-Automated task, for Run As, click Select Run As Account, search for andselect a user under which tasks of this type are run, and click OK.

Creating Tasks 85

Page 86: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Note: If the selected Run As user is the user creating the task, authorization is notrequired.

14 Select Active to include this task in schedules generated from the template.

Note: This option is not available for tasks created in schedules.

Setting Task ParametersThe Parameters tab only contains data for tasks that as associated with an Integration Type andhave parameters. Integration Types provide links to external applications. On the Parameterstab, you can set specific information about the task and how it is run. The parameters are passedto the external application. For example, if the task contains a link to a data grid, you might usethe Parameters tab to select a point of view for the grid.

ä To set task parameters:

1 From the New Task dialog, select the Parameters tab.

2 If the parameter values are not entered by the task type, enter the required parameter values.

Specifying ChildrenFrom the Task Type list, if you selected Parent as the Task Type, the Children tab replaces theParameters tab.

Task hierarchies make templates and schedules easier to navigate by grouping related tasks. Youdefine task hierarchies by creating parent tasks and adding other tasks to them as children. Youcan expand a parent task to display its children or collapse it to hide them. You can use theChildren tab to specify tasks below a task in the hierarchy. The Existing Tasks list displays a listof available tasks that are not children of other tasks.

ä To specify child tasks:

1 From the New Task dialog, select the Children tab.

2 From the Existing Tasks list, select tasks.

3 Click Move or Move All to move the tasks to the Selected Tasks list.

Tip: To remove tasks, select them from the Selected Tasks list and click Remove or RemoveAll to return them to the Existing Tasks list.

Specifying Task InstructionsTask owners can create a set of instructions for completing the task. All other users who haveaccess to the task are only able to read the instructions. If there are task instructions that areinherited from the Task Type, template, or schedule, that instruction text is displayed above theinstruction text box and is read-only.

86 Managing Tasks

Page 87: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

You can also create references to external documents. You can upload a document from yourlocal computer, create a Web link, or create a link to a document in Oracle Content Management.References inherited from the Task Type or template are locked, however you can add references.

For template tasks, the Template and Task Types instructions are viewable but not editable.

ä To specify instructions:

1 From the New Task dialog, select the Instructions tab.

2 In Instructions, enter instruction text.

ä To add a reference:

1 In the References section, Select Actions, and then Add, or select the Add icon.

2 From the Type list, select one of these types:

l Local File

Enter a name, click Browse to select and attach the file, and click OK.

l URL

Enter a URL name, then enter the URL, for example: Oracle, http://www.oracle.com.

l Repository File (Optional)

From the file list, select the file, and click OK.

Note: The Repository File option is only displayed if Financial Close Management isconfigured with Oracle Enterprise Content Management.

Adding Task Questions

Note: The Questions tab is not displayed for automated tasks or parent tasks.

When you create a task, you may want the assignee to answer questions about their actions beforethey indicate a task is complete. For example, you may ask if a certain process was followed whencompleting that task.

You can specify questions on the task. You can specify various types of questions, such as Text,Number, or True/False, and indicate whether they are required. If a question is required, theuser must respond or they cannot submit the task for approval. You can also order the questionsby using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.

For schedule tasks, users can respond to the questions from the Task Actions page. If you arecreating or updating a task in a template, an additional column displays, showing whether therow is locked or unlocked to indicate whether the user can remove or update the questions.Rows that are locked cannot be edited or deleted because they are inherited from the Task Type.

In templates, the Task Type questions are displayed, but are not editable.

Creating Tasks 87

Page 88: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To add a question:

1 From the New Task dialog, select the Questions tab.

2 Click Add.

3 In the Question text box, enter the question text.

4 From the Type list, select a type:

l Yes/No

l True/False

l Date

l List—Choice of values

If you select List, enter a list of valid responses to the question.

l Number

If you select Number, select formatting options:

m For Decimal Places, enter a value for the number of decimal places to display.

m Select Thousands Separator if you want numbers to display a thousands separator(for example, 1,000.00)

m From the Currency Symbol list, select a currency symbol, for example, Dollars ($).

m From the Negative Number list, select how to display negative numbers, forexample, (123).

m From the Scale list, select a scale value for numbers, for example, 1000.

l Text

5 If the question is required, select the Required check box.

6 Click OK.

7 Optional: To change the order of questions, select a question, then click Move to Top, Move Up, MoveDown, or Move to Bottom.

Tip: To edit a question, select the question and click Edit. To remove a question, select thequestion and click Delete.

Setting Task AccessThe Access tab enables you to add or remove Viewers and Approvers for the current task. It alsoenables you to specify the order of approvers. You can specify up to ten approvers and anunlimited number of viewers.

ä To set task access:

1 From the New Task dialog, select the Access tab.

2 From the Approvers or Viewers section, click Add.

88 Managing Tasks

Page 89: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 Enter the first or last name of the user, then click Search.

To specifically identify a user, click Advance, then enter a User ID, Email address, orDescription.

Tip: For additional details about the user, such as groups and roles, click Details.

4 Optional: To change the order of approvers, select users, then click Move to Top, Move Up, MoveDown, or Move to Bottom.

Tip: To remove a user from the Approvers or Viewers list, select the user, then click Remove.

Setting Task PredecessorsThe Predecessors tab enables you to set predecessors for the current task. For template tasks,you can choose a predecessor from another template, and for schedule tasks, you can choose apredecessor from another schedule. You must assign a condition to the predecessor/successorrelationship.

A task does not need predecessor tasks as long as a start date and time is specified. If both arespecified, the task begins when the predecessor tasks are started or complete (for Finish-to-Start)and the start date and time is reached.

You can set these conditions under which the predecessor relationship is established:

Note: Event Monitoring tasks can not have predecessors; however they can be predecessors toother types of tasks.

Condition Description

Finish to Start Default. The task starts as soon as the predecessor task completes or finishes with warning.

Finish Error to Start The task starts as soon as the predecessor task completes, even it is in error.

Finish Error to Finish The task completes as soon as the predecessor task completes, even it is in error.

Finish to Finish The task cannot be marked as Complete until the predecessor task is marked as complete. This is primarily usedfor user tasks. For example, a user can start a document summary, but cannot mark it complete until the consolidateddata is final.

ä To set task predecessors:

1 From the New Task dialog, select the Predecessors tab.

2 Click Add.

3 Click Browse and select a predecessor task, then click OK.

Tip: You can also select a different template or schedule from the dropdown list.

4 From the Condition list, select a condition:

Creating Tasks 89

Page 90: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Finish to Start

l Finish to Finish

l Finish Error to Start

l Finish Error to Finish

Applying Task AttributesTo locate tasks in the system, you can apply custom attributes to the task. When you select anattribute, you can set a value for the attribute based on the attribute type. You can later filter bythe attribute value.

For example, you may have a List attribute named Sales Region with the values of North, South,East, and West. The current task applies only to the West Sales Region, so you can add the SalesRegion attribute and set it to “West.”

ä To apply task attributes:

1 From the New Task dialog, select the Attributes tab.

2 Click Add.

3 From the Attribute list, select an attribute.

4 For Value, depending on the attribute, select a value for the attribute from a drop-down list, or enter avalue.

5 Optional: Select Display To User if you want the attribute to display on the Task Actions and the ReportBinder Task page.

6 Optional: From the Updatable by list, select an option that determines which task roles can update theattribute value.

7 Select Required if the attribute value is required.

8 Click OK.

9 Click Save and Close to save the task.

Viewing Task HistoryFor each task, the system retains a history of the changes made to it; for example, a shift in datesor change in ownership. Each change record includes the field, modification type such as added,created, or changed, the old and new values, the user who made the change, and the date onwhich the change was made. The information on this tab is read-only.

ä To view task history:

1 From the Task dialog, select the History tab.

2 Select a task.

3 When you finish, click Save and Close.

90 Managing Tasks

Page 91: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Editing TasksYou can edit tasks depending on their status and your security rights. For example, you can edita task description, custom attributes, or end date.

For an Open task in a Task List, you cannot edit the start date, because the task has started. Youcan only change the duration or the end date. You also cannot edit instructions, questions,assignee, or approver, and you cannot add, delete, or edit predecessors. You can reassign theassignee or approver from the Task Actions workflow.

ä To edit a task:

1 From the Calendar, Gantt, or Task List view, select the task that you want to edit.

2 Right-click on the task and select Edit, or from a Task List, you can also Select Actions, and thenEdit.

3 Edit the task information.

4 Click Save and Close.

Sorting TasksFrom the Task List, you can sort tasks by ascending or descending order. You can sort by ScheduleName, Status, Owner, Start or End Date, or Duration.

ä To sort tasks:

1 Select View, then Task List, or from the toolbar, click the Task List button.

2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display, then click Sort Ascending or Sort

Descending .

Searching for TasksYou can use the Task Find feature to find specific tasks. For example, you might enter “load” tofind load tasks. You can search using full or partial words. You can scroll through the resultsusing the Previous and Next buttons.

ä To search for a task:

1 From the left pane, expand Task Find.

2 Enter a task name in the search field, and click Find Task.

3 Click Previous or Next to find the previous or next task that matches the search criteria.

Editing Tasks 91

Page 92: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Moving TasksYou can use views to move tasks. For example, in the Calendar view, you can move tasks to adifferent day.

ä To move a task:

1 From the Calendar, Gantt, or Task List view, select a task.

2 Right-click on the task and drag it to a new location, or cut, copy, and paste the task.

3 Navigate to the target destination for the task and click OK.

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting TasksYou can use views to cut and copy tasks in templates and schedules. For example, in the Calendarview, you can copy a task from one day in the calendar and paste it to another. You can copy atask from one schedule or template and paste it into another.

When you paste a task, the Task Details dialog box opens and enables you to modify the taskthat you are pasting.

If you paste a task onto a parent task, the pasted task becomes a child of the parent task. If youpaste a task onto a child task, the pasted task becomes a sibling of the child task.

Note: Cut, Copy, and Paste features are not available for parent tasks. The Cut function is notavailable for scheduled (open or closed) tasks.

ä To cut, copy, or paste a task:

1 From the Calendar, Gantt, or Task List view, select a task.

2 Right-click on the task and select an action, or from the main toolbar, click a toolbar button:

l Select Cut to cut the task and store it on the clipboard.

l Select Copy to copy the task and store it on the clipboard.

3 Right-click on the task, then select Paste, or from the main menu toolbar, select Paste.

The Task Details dialog box opens and enables you to make changes to the task that you arepasting.

4 Click OK to complete the paste operation.

The task is inserted and the views and filter views are refreshed to display the pasted task.

Deleting TasksYou can delete tasks that you no longer need. To delete a task, you must have Close Administratoror Close Power User security rights.

92 Managing Tasks

Page 93: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

In schedules, you can delete only tasks that have a status of Pending. You cannot delete tasksthat have a status of Open or Closed. If you delete a parent task, you can choose to delete justthe parent, or the parent and its children.

ä To delete a task:

1 From the Calendar, Gantt, or Task List view, select the task that you want to delete.

2 Right-click on the task and select Delete, or from the main toolbar, click the Delete button.

3 At the delete confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Deleting Tasks 93

Page 94: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

94 Managing Tasks

Page 95: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

8Managing Schedules

In This Chapter

Creating Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Manually Creating Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Opening Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Editing Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Adding Tasks to Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Importing Tasks into Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Updating Tasks in Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Reassigning Users .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Authorizing System-Automated Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Setting Schedule Status... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Viewing Schedule History.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Validating Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Locking Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Viewing Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Searching for Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Deleting Schedules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

A schedule defines a chronologically ordered set of tasks that must be executed for a specificreporting period, and is the application of a template into the calendar. For example, you canapply the Quarterly Close template to the Calendar as Q109 Close Schedule for the first Quarter,then apply the template again as Q209 Close for the second quarter.

Schedules have a status of Pending, Open, Closed, or Locked. You can change the status of aschedule from Pending to Open, or from Open to Closed or Locked.

Note: After a schedule is set to Open, it cannot be reset to Pending. When a schedule is set toLocked, its status cannot be changed.

95

Page 96: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating SchedulesTo create a schedule, you must be a Close Administrator or Power User. A Power User can runCreate Schedule on a template or select New from Manage Schedules. You can manually definea schedule from the Manage Schedules page, or create a schedule from a template. When youcreate a schedule from a template, all values are inherited from the template definition.

Manually Creating Schedules

Subtopics

l Setting Schedule Properties

l Assigning Schedule Viewers

l Applying Schedule Attributes

l Adding Instructions to Schedules

ä To manually create a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 From the Manage Schedules page, click New.

Setting Schedule PropertiesThe Properties tab enables you to set the name, description, start and end dates, and owners forschedules. The schedule owner must be a Close Administrator or Power User. The default owneris the current user. The start and end dates specify the initial date range for the schedule, however,after the schedule is created, you can add tasks with dates earlier or later and the properties areupdated to reflect the earliest and latest dates.

96 Managing Schedules

Page 97: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To set schedule properties:

1 Create a new schedule and select the Properties tab.

2 For Name, enter a schedule name.

3 For Description, enter a schedule description.

4 For Start Date, enter the starting date for the schedule.

5 For End Date, enter the end date for the schedule.

6 From the Year list, select a year.

7 From the Period list, select a period.

8 For the Day Zero Date, enter the date to assign as day zero.

9 For Owner, enter a schedule owner name, or click the Select Owner button to see a list of users withClose Administrator or Power User roles, select an owner, and click OK.

Note: You can select only one owner for a schedule. The owner must be an individual user,not a group. If you do not select a user, the owner defaults to the current user.

10 From the Status list, select a schedule status:

Note: The schedule status is initially set to Pending and is display only.

Assigning Schedule ViewersThe Viewers tab enables you to assign viewer rights for schedules. A schedule can have multipleviewers, however they must have Financial Close Management security roles. Viewers receiveread-only access to all tasks in the schedule.

ä To assign viewer rights:

1 Select the Viewers tab.

2 Click Add.

3 To search by users or groups, click the Search Users button, then select Users or Groups.

4 Enter a user name, or part of the name, then click Search.

5 To identify a user, click Advanced, then enter a User ID, Email address, or Description.

6 From the Search Results list, select users.

7 For additional details about the user, such as groups and roles, click Details.

8 Click Add or Add All to move users to the Selected list.

Tip: To remove users, select users, then click Remove or Remove All.

Manually Creating Schedules 97

Page 98: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Applying Schedule AttributesTo locate schedules in the system, you can apply custom attributes to the schedule. When youselect an attribute, you can set a value for the attribute based on the attribute type. You can laterfilter by the attribute value.

For example, you may have a List attribute named Sales Region with the values of North, South,East, and West. The current schedule applies only to the West Sales Region, so you can add theSales Region attribute and set it to “West.”

ä To apply an attribute:

1 Select the Attributes tab.

2 Click Add.

3 From the Attribute list, select an attribute.

4 For Value, depending on the attribute, select a value for the attribute from a drop-down list, or enter avalue.

5 Click OK.

Adding Instructions to SchedulesYou can specify instructions and supporting documents for a schedule, which are then inheritedby all tasks in the schedule.

ä To add instructions to a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Select a schedule to which to add instructions.

3 Click Edit.

4 In Instructions, enter instructions for the schedule.

5 To add a reference:

a. In the References section, Click Add.

b. From the Type list, select one of these types:

l Local File

Enter a name, click Browse to select and attach the file, and click OK.

l URL

Enter a URL name, then enter the URL, for example: Oracle, http://www.oracle.com, and click OK.

l Optional: Repository File

From the file list, select the file, and click OK.

98 Managing Schedules

Page 99: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Note: The Repository File option is only displayed if Financial Close Managementis configured with Oracle Enterprise Content Management.

6 Click OK to save the schedule.

Opening SchedulesYou open schedules to add, edit, or work on tasks. You open schedules from the ManageSchedules dialog box.

Note: To set a schedule to an Open status, see “Setting Schedule Status” on page 104.

ä To open a schedule:

1 From Manage Schedules, select a schedule.

2 Use one of these methods:

l Select Actions, and then Open.

l Click the Open icon.

l Right-click and select Open.

Editing SchedulesYou can edit schedules to change the properties, such as the name or the schedule or the startand end dates. You cannot change the start date to a date later than the first task in the schedule,or the end date to a date earlier than the last task in the schedule. You can make changes to anOpen or Pending schedule to modify pending tasks. You cannot add, change, or delete tasks ina Closed or Locked schedule. To edit a schedule, you must be the schedule owner or a CloseAdministrator.

ä To edit a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Select a schedule to edit.

3 Select Actions, and then Edit, or select the Edit icon.

4 Edit the schedule.

5 Click OK.

Adding Tasks to SchedulesYou can add tasks to a schedule if it is Pending or Open. You cannot add tasks to a Closed orLocked schedule.

Opening Schedules 99

Page 100: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

For detailed instructions on adding tasks, see “Creating Tasks” on page 84.

ä To add a task to a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Open a schedule in a view, such as Calendar-Month.

3 Add tasks.

Importing Tasks into SchedulesYou can import tasks, or partial task data, from text files into a schedule with a status of Pendingor Open. For example, if you have a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet with task definitions, you cansave the file as a CSV file, then import it into a schedule. You can also use the Import feature toquickly add many repetitive tasks by editing the fields in a CSV file and importing it, rather thancreating individual new tasks.

You cannot import tasks into schedules that have a Closed or Locked status.

Note: Before you import a file to a schedule using the Update option for a closed task, removethe Owner, Assignee, Approver, and Start Date and Time fields from the import file, oran error occurs.

If you import information on an End-User task that has started running, it is reset to Open withAssignee status, and the answers to questions are cleared.

ä To import tasks into a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Click Import Tasks.

3 Enter the name of the file to import, or click Browse to find the file.

4 Select an import option:

l Replace

l Replace All

l Update

Note: The system displays a warning that tasks in the schedule that match a task ID in theimport file will be modified. If you do not want to overwrite the task, click Cancel.

5 Click Import.

l If the import is successful, the “Import Success” dialog box is displayed, indicating theschedule name, the name of the file containing the tasks, and the total number of tasksimported. Click OK.

100 Managing Schedules

Page 101: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l If errors are found, the import process is not run, and the Import Errors dialog boxdisplays the errors. View the errors, then click OK to return to Manage Schedules.

Updating Tasks in SchedulesYou may need to periodically manually update information on a task that is running, and in thiscase, you can reopen it. When you reopen a task, it is reset to Open with Assignee status, andyou can edit the information. For example, you can change the instructions and references,attributes, and questions. If you make changes, previous answers to questions are cleared.

Reopening a series of tasks does not reestablish the predecessor relationships. All end-user tasksare reset to Open with Assignee. No tasks are reverted to Pending status.

You may also need to restart System-Automated tasks if they end in error. You can reopen thetasks to rerun the process.

You can reopen tasks under these conditions:

Table 1 Conditions for Reopening Tasks

Task Status End-User System-Automated

With Assignee/Running

You can edit or import data into the Instruction, Attribute, orQuestion sections. When you save the task, it is reset to theassignee, and the answers to questions are cleared.

No updates are allowed to running system-automatedtasks.

With Approver You can edit or import data in to the Instruction, Attribute, orQuestion sections. When you save the task, it is reset to theassignee, and the answers to questions are cleared.

Approver must reject the task, which sets it to Errorstatus. From Task Details, the task owner can clickReopen to reopen the task and make changes. Whenyou save the task, the Web service runs again.

Closed/Error From Task Details, the task owner can click Reopen to reopenthe task and make changes. When you save the task, it is resetto the assignee.

From Task Details, the task owner can click Reopento reopen the task and make changes. When you savethe task, the Web service runs again.

ä To update tasks in a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Open a schedule.

3 Select a task with a Closed or Error status.

4 Click Reopen.

5 Edit the task.

6 If the system displays a warning that the assignee must complete the task again, or that the service willbe executed again, click Yes to continue or No to cancel.

7 Perform an action:

l For a Closed task, click Close.

l For an Error task, click Save and Close.

Updating Tasks in Schedules 101

Page 102: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Reassigning UsersYou may periodically need to reassign users to different schedules. For example, you may createa schedule and assign a user to certain rights; however, later that employee leaves the companyand another employee assumes those schedules. You can use the Reassign feature in the ManageSchedules dialog box to automatically change assignments instead of manually searching for,opening, and editing individual schedules. The Reassign feature enables you to quickly find theschedules associated with one user and reassign them to another.

ä To reassign users:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Select a schedules in which you want to reassign users.

3 Select Actions, and then Reassign User.

4 For Find User, click Find User and enter search criteria for the user that you want to replace:

a. From the Select User dialog, enter the first or last name for the user, and click Search.

b. Select the user from the results, then click OK

5 For Replace with, click Find User and enter search criteria for the user to whom you want to reassigntasks:

a. From the Select User dialog, enter the first or last name for the user, and click Search.

b. Select the user from the results, then click OK.

6 Select the Ending Between dates.

7 Select roles for the user that must be reassigned:

l Owner

l Assignee

l Approver

l Viewer

8 Click Reassign.

When the process ends, the system displays a “Reassign Users - Success” message thatindicates that the user reassignment is complete, and displays the schedule name and totalnumber of user reassignments made.

Authorizing System-Automated TasksWhen you create tasks or Task Types for System-Automated tasks, for security purposes, youspecify a user account under which the task is run. To preserve security, you may requireauthorization to perform the task if any of these conditions occurs:

l If you add a System-Automated task with an alternate runtime user known as the RunAs IDto a schedule, from a template or by manually adding the task

102 Managing Schedules

Page 103: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l When you set a schedule to Open status, the system automatically issues a request forauthorization if it has not been completed.

l If the parameters of a task are modified by a user other than the assignee (or task owner ifthe owner is also the assignee), the authorization is reset to unauthorized and must beobtained by entering a password. For System-Automated tasks, if a user other than thespecified or default Run As user modifies the parameters, the task is reset to unauthorized.

Authorization ensures that the user performing the System-Automated task has securityprivileges for the application and data for which the task runs. An administrator who knows thecredentials of the runtime user can perform the authorization or issue a request to the user toobtain authorization.

When the System-Automated task is scheduled to run, if authorization is not provided, the taskis not run, and its status changes to Needs Attention. If an owner or assignee edits the task, thetask details indicate that authorization is required. In this case, only the RunAs ID can authorizethe task.

A user who receives a request for authorization can access the Authorization dialog box from alink in the email or by logging on to the application. See the Oracle Hyperion Financial CloseManagement User's Guide.

ä To authorize a task:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Select a schedule.

3 Select Actions, and then Authorize Tasks, or select the Authorize Tasks icon.

The system displays a Users selection list and a table of unauthorized tasks for the selectedschedule. The user selection list is populated with users that have pending System-Automated tasks assigned to them that require authorization.

4 From the user selection list, select a user.

The system displays a list of unauthorized tasks for that user. Your user name displays firston the list in bold by default. If you have no unauthorized tasks, the list is blank.

5 Select a task that needs authorization.

6 To view task details, click a task name and review the task parameters.

Tip: To contact the task owner by email, click the Owner name next to the task and viewthe user details.

7 If you select a user other than yourself, the system prompts you for the user password.

a. If you know the user password, enter it. The list of unauthorized tasks is displayed. Selecttasks and click Authorize to authorize them, which removes them from the list.

b. If you do not know the user password and must request authorization from the user,click Send Authorization Request, which sends an email to that user.

Authorizing System-Automated Tasks 103

Page 104: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Setting Schedule StatusYou manage the schedule lifecycle by setting the schedule status. You can set the status of aschedule to Open, Closed, or Locked, depending on its current status. To set schedule status,you must the schedule owner or a Close Administrator.

These are the available statuses:

l Pending - the schedule is not yet active. This is the default status of the schedule when it iscreated.

l Open - the schedule is open for work to be performed. Tasks in the schedule can be run.

l Closed - the schedule is no longer active but follow-up work may be required. Tasks in theschedule continue to proceed based on their definitions, but you cannot add tasks to theschedule. Schedule owners or administrators can reopen a Closed schedule, which changesits status to Open.

l Locked - the schedule is locked and cannot be modified. A locked schedule cannot be setback to Open status and cannot be edited. It can be viewed and deleted.

When you create a schedule, it has a status of Pending by default so that you can make finaladjustments to it, and add, edit, or delete tasks.

To run a schedule, you change the status from Pending to Open. When the schedule is opened,tasks begin to execute according to their definition. Status for tasks that have met their startingcondition are set to Open, and task notifications are sent to their assignees.

Note: If a schedule task start time is reached and authorization has not been provided for asystem-automated task, the task remains in the Pending status and requires authorization.See “Authorizing System-Automated Tasks” on page 102.

When work on the schedule has reached a stage when follow-up work is all that is required, youset the status to Closed. You cannot add new tasks to a Closed schedule, however users cancontinue to work on tasks that are not complete. You can reopen a closed schedule, whichchanges its status to Open.

When all close tasks are completed, you set the status to Locked. You cannot edit a Lockedschedule, or set it back to Open.

ä To set schedule status:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Select a schedule for which to set status.

3 Select Actions, and then Set Status, or select the Set Status dropdown.

4 Click one of these status options, depending on the current status:

l Open

l Closed

104 Managing Schedules

Page 105: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Locked

Viewing Schedule HistoryThe system maintains a history of schedule actions, which you can view from the ManageSchedules dialog box. The History tab displays the components that were updated, themodification type, the old and new values, the user who made the modification, and the changedate. The information on this tab is read-only.

ä To view a schedule history:

1 Select Manage, then Schedule.

2 Select a schedule.

3 Perform one of these actions:

l If the schedule status is Pending or Open, select Actions, and then Edit.

l If the schedule status is Closed or Locked, select Actions, and then Properties.

4 Select the History tab and review the schedule history.

5 When you finish, click OK.

Validating SchedulesYou can validate schedules with a status of Pending or Open. Validating a schedule checks forproblems with start and end dates, predecessor relationships, parent-child relationships, andmissing task parameters for product integrations. You cannot change a schedule status fromPending to Open until all validation errors are resolved. To validate schedules, you must theschedule owner or a Close Administrator.

ä To validate a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Select a schedule to validate.

3 Select Actions, and then Validate, or select the Validate icon.

l If there are no errors, the system displays a Schedule Valid success message.

l If errors exist, the system displays a list.

Locking SchedulesYou can lock a schedule to prevent users from making further changes.

ä To lock a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

Viewing Schedule History 105

Page 106: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

2 From the list of schedules, select a schedule.

3 Select Actions, and then Set Status, or from the Set Status dropdown, select Locked.

4 Click Close.

Viewing SchedulesIn Manage Schedules, you can specify which columns to display for the list of schedules, or showall. You can also reorder columns, sort columns by ascending or descending order, or changethe column widths.

ä To display columns:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Select View, then Columns, and select an option:

l To display all columns, select Show All.

l To display specific columns, select or deselect the column names.

ä To reorder columns:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Select View, then Reorder Columns.

3 Select columns and use the Up and Down arrows to reorder.

4 Click OK.

ä To sort columns:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Hover over a column header until the Sort icons display, then click Sort Ascending or Sort

Descending .

ä To change column widths:

1 Hover over the column header dividers until the arrows display.

2 Drag the columns to the desired width.

Searching for SchedulesYou can use the Manage Schedules dialog box to quickly find schedules. You can enter full orpartial names on which to search. You can search on additional fields such as Start Date andOwner.

106 Managing Schedules

Page 107: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

If you are an administrator, the Manage Schedules page displays a list of all schedules in thesystem. If you are a Power User or Close User, the system displays a list of schedules to whichyou have access.

ä To search for a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 Click the > sign to expand the Search box.

3 Enter full or partial search criteria for the schedule.

4 Optional: For additional search operators (such as Contains, Starts with, Ends with), click Advanced,and enter search criteria.

Tip: Click Add Fields to select additional fields for search criteria.

5 Click Search.

Tip: To reset the list to display all schedules, click Reset.

Deleting SchedulesYou can delete a schedule that you no longer need. To delete a schedule, you must be the scheduleowner or a Close Administrator. Deleting a schedule removes it and all references to it from thesystem.

ä To delete a schedule:

1 Select Manage, then Schedules.

2 From Manage Schedules, select the schedule that you want to delete.

3 Click Delete.

4 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Deleting Schedules 107

Page 108: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

108 Managing Schedules

Page 109: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

9Using Report Binders

In This Chapter

Generating Report Binders .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Viewing Report Binders .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Report binders enable you to create a history of all activities that occurred as part of a closeschedule, for example, the Corporate Q1 Close. You use filters to specify the schedule, tasks toinclude, and which task information to include.

Information for all tasks that meet the binder filter criteria are output in HTML to a ZIP file.They contain HTML and other files. When you extract the ZIP file, a directory structure isformed, in which you can access the HTML file to view the report binder. Because the report isself-contained in one file, it can easily be copied, printed, or emailed for internal or externalreviews.

Generating Report BindersThe Generate Report Binder dialog box enables you to specify the parameters needed to createa report. When you open a schedule in a view and run Generate Report Binder, the report binderis applied to the current view and incorporates only the tasks within the current filtered view.

The report binder is generated and returned through the browser as a document. When you runGenerate Report Binder, you have the option to open it immediately or to save it to disk as aZIP file.

ä To generate a report binder:

1 Open a schedule in a Task List, Gantt, or Calendar view.

2 Optional: Apply filters to reduce the number of displayed tasks.

3 Perform an action:

l From the main menu, select Tools, then Generate Report Binder.

l From the main menu, click Generate Report Binder.

l Select Manage Schedules, highlight the schedule, Select Select Actions, and then GenerateReport Binder.

4 In Report Binder Name, enter a name.

Generating Report Binders 109

Page 110: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

5 In Description, enter a binder description.

For Schedule Name, the system automatically displays the name of the current schedule.

6 From Optional Components, select the task components that you want to display in the report:

l Alerts

l Comments

l Attachments

Note: Including attachments in the report greatly increases the size of the report and mayimpact the performance.

7 Click Generate.

8 From File Download, select Save.

The Save As dialog is displayed, and the ZIP file name is displayed at the bottom.

9 Select a directory for the ZIP file, click Save, then Close.

Viewing Report BindersWhen you generate a report binder, it is output in one zipped file. The ZIP file name is the namethat you specified for the Report Binder. The report pages are merged into an HTML report,with page breaks for sections as required, so that the report can be printed with a print command.If you choose to include attachments, a separate attachment appendix, containing links toattachments with corresponding tasks and alerts, is created, which you can print separately. Allattachments are downloaded to separate folders.

If you saved the report binder as a ZIP file, you can extract everything from the ZIP, which createsa directory structure with the same name as the report binder. You can see the report binder byopening the HTML page in the directory. The first report page contains information on thereport binder, the schedule, and displays a list of tasks and alerts available in the report binder.You can navigate to the Tasks section to see task details such as status, assignee, start and enddates, and duration. If a task has not started, the projected (scheduled) date is displayed. Eachtask is a link to a Task Detail page. By default, it includes sections for Attributes, Instructions,Questions, Workflow, Predecessors, and History. If you selected the options to include Alertsand Comments when you generated the report binder, those sections are also displayed.

The first page also contains a list of alerts into which you can drill further. From the Alert Detailpage, you can navigate to the associated task.

ä To view report binders:

1 Navigate to the directory in which you downloaded the ZIP file, and double-click the file.

2 Extract the ZIP files to the desired directory.

3 Navigate to that directory and locate the subdirectory that matches the ZIP file name.

4 From the subdirectory, double-click report_binder_name.html to view the report binder.

110 Using Report Binders

Page 111: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

P a r t I I

Account Reconciliation Manager

In Account Reconciliation Manager:

l About Account Reconciliation Managerl Setting Up Account Reconciliation Managerl Navigating in Account Reconciliation Managerl Managing Profilesl Managing Reconciliationsl Using Report Binders

Account Reconciliation Manager 111

Page 112: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

112 Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 113: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

10About Account Reconciliation

Manager

In This Chapter

Account Reconciliation Manager Terms... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Process Overview... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Sample Task Flows... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Account Reconciliation Manager TermsAccount Reconciliation

A process of analyzing account balances and providing a justification of the balances. Identifydifferences and make corrections.

Aging Buckets

Time periods you define to age your reconciliation transactions in the Aging Analysis Dashboard.For example, you can define an aging bucket that includes all reconciliation transactions thatare 1 to 30 days old. Aging buckets are contained within an aging profile.

Aging Profile

A collection of aging buckets.

Attributes

A parameter, or option, that controls how the function activity operates, or definescharacteristics of the function activity.

Frequency

Determines how often reconciliations are prepared and renewed. Frequencies are defined insystem setup and are associated with profiles and periods.

Periods

Unit of time for which an Account Reconciliation is completed; for example, January 2011,February 2011.

Profiles

The precursor to reconciliations. Profiles contain the configuration settings that determine howand when reconciliations occur. Profiles are copied to the period, causing a reconciliation to becreated that contains a snapshot of the profile at that time.

Reconciliations

Account Reconciliation Manager Terms 113

Page 114: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

An Account Reconciliation for a specific Period. Reconciliations consist of account balances(obtained from the Source System for the Period) and account properties (derived from theAccount Profile and Format and subject to change independently of the profile).

Source System

One data repository within a system.

Process OverviewAdministrators use Account Reconciliation Manager to manage account reconciliationsaccording to policy. Reconciliations require these steps:

1. The administrator sets up users. See “Setting Up Users” on page 120.

2. The administrator completes the required setup procedures:

l Define profile segments. See “Managing Profile Segments” on page 123.

l Set up frequencies. See “Managing Frequencies” on page 124.

l For multiple currencies, the administrator defines currency. See “Defining Currency”on page 125.

3. The administrator completes the optional setup procedures:

l Set up system attributes. See “Editing System Attributes” on page 127.

l Set up Power User security. See “Setting Power User Security” on page 128.

l Set up aging profiles. See “Managing Aging Profiles” on page 129.

4. The administrator determines how reconciliations are performed for each account type,creating formats that control the method of reconciliation and ensuring the capture of theinformation.

5. The administrator creates a profile for each account to be reconciled, assigning a format,currency settings, workflow, and other attributes.

6. Mapping rules are configured in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management ERPIntegration Adapter for Oracle Applications (ERPI) to ensure that source and subsystemaccount balances are properly reflected in reconciliations.

7. To initiate reconciliations for a period, the administrator copies the profiles into the period,which creates the reconciliations with the start dates and due dates.

8. The administrator imports balances and changes the period status from Pending to Open.At this time, reconciliations that meet the criteria for auto-reconciliation are completedautomatically.

During the reconciliation cycle, users receive email notifications of assigned reconciliationsand delinquencies, and can click links in the email to open the Reconciliation List for accessto the reconciliations.

Alternatively, users can log on to Account Reconciliation Manager to review and accessassigned reconciliations in Dashboards and List Views.

114 About Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 115: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Preparation of reconciliations follows a structured workflow:

1. The preparer performs the reconciliation, including validating the account balance andproviding all required documentation.

2. After preparation is complete, the reconciliation cycles through assigned levels of reviewuntil all reviews are completed.

3. Reviewers are responsible for verifying the preparer’s work. If the work is sufficient, thereconciliation is approved. If revision is required, the reconciliation is rejected, causing it torevert to the preparer. Users with viewer or commentator privileges can access thereconciliation throughout its lifecycle.

4. Account Reconciliation Manager users can define and generate a Report Binder for selectedreconciliations across periods. Report Binders enable administrators and others to viewreconciliations offline and are also useful for audit purposes.

Sample Task Flows

Scenario 1 – AdministratorIn this scenario, an administrator configures profiles during implementation of AccountReconciliation Manager and uses the profile import feature to load profiles into AccountReconciliation Manager.

1. From the Profile List View, the administrator exports profiles, selecting the unformatteddata for future import option to create a CSV file template to gather profile data.

2. The administrator copies and pastes information into the profile import file, includingaccount segments, name, description, and other profile properties. Because theadministrator does not yet have all information for all profiles, some of the columns areblank. The administrator updates these attributes as the information becomes available.

3. From the Profile List View, the administrator imports the profiles, choosing the Replaceoption.

4. The administrator updates the profiles in Account Reconciliation Manager, using acombination of manual edits to profiles and mass updates of profile data using the Actionspanel.

5. As the administrator nears the end of the profile configuration process, a policy change isimplemented requiring re-assignment of the risk rating values. The administrator decidesthe easiest way to accomplish the re-assignment is to configure the new values in aspreadsheet and import them. The administrator starts by exporting the list of profiles fromthe Profile List View using the unformatted data for future import option. Then, theadministrator deletes all columns except the account segment and risk rating columns.

6. The administrator imports the changes using the import Profiles feature on the Profile ListView. This time, the administrator selects the Update option, ensuring only the risk ratingattribute is updated.

Sample Task Flows 115

Page 116: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Scenario 2 – AdministratorIn this scenario, an administrator receives notice that an employee currently functioning as apreparer has taken a position with another department and no longer performs reconciliations.The profiles and reconciliations assigned to this user must be reassigned.

1. The administrator must reassign profiles so that future reconciliations are properly assigned.From the Profile List View, the administrator identifies all profiles assigned to the user byapplying a filter on the Preparer Name. Then, using the Actions panel on the Profile ListView, the administrator changes the preparer assignment by selecting the Preparer optionin the Add User section and providing the new user name in the Value field. After pressingthe Add button, the administrator selects to update all records and receives confirmationthat the update is successful.

2. The administrator checks to see whether this user has pending or open reconciliations. Fromthe Reconciliation List View, the administrator again filters by Preparer Name and finds tworeconciliations Open with this preparer, and three reconciliations that are Pending.

3. The administrator reassigns the Pending and Open reconciliations using the Actions panel.

Scenario 3 – AdministratorIn this scenario, an administrator initiates reconciliations for a period by copying profiles to theperiod, running a data load, checking for unmapped accounts, and opening the period.

1. From the Manage Periods dialog box, the administrator selects the period for whichreconciliations must be created and clicks Copy Profiles.

2. After confirming that all profiles copied successfully, the administrator initiates a data loadby clicking the Data Load icon, and then clicking the New icon to initiate a new data load.

3. In the New Data Load dialog box, the administrator provides a name for the data load, selectsthe Locations for which data should be loaded, and clicks OK to initiate the data load andclose the dialog box.

4. In the Data Load dialog box, the administrator monitors the data load, noting that a warningexists for unmapped accounts. Accounts exist in the source system that were not mappedto a profile in Account Reconciliation Manager. The administrator views the unmappedaccounts, corrects the mapping in ERP Integrator, and returns to Account ReconciliationManager to rerun the data import. The administrator confirms that the data load completedsuccessfully and without warnings.

5. Now, the administrator is ready to open the Period. From the Manage Periods dialog box,the administrator selects the period to be opened, selects Set Status from the drop-down list,and then selects the Open option, causing the reconciliation status to change to Open forall reconciliations.

6. Preparers are ready to begin their work.

116 About Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 117: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Scenario 4 – Power UserIn this scenario, a Power User performs maintenance on profiles within his security profile,which includes all profiles with Company Codes ranging from 50-55.

1. The power user receives an email notification that reviewer assignments must change for aseries of profiles. These profiles are within the security profile of the power user.

2. From the Profile List View, the power user creates a filter to retrieve the affected accountsand uses the Actions panel to apply the necessary changes to reviewer assignments.

3. Later that day, the power user receives an email from the administrator informing him thatnew profiles must be created for general ledger account 1729 (a new account), for allcompany codes within the security profile of the power user. The power user decides theeasiest way to create these profiles is to import them from a CSV file. From the Profile ListView, he exports a sample profile using the Export profiles – unformatted data for futureimport option to create a template file. Then, he creates seven new profiles in this importfile – one for company codes 50-56.

4. The power user imports the profiles. During import, Account Reconciliation Managernotifies him that profile 56-1729 is outside his security profile and cannot be created. Thepower user realizes he made a mistake, because his profile includes Company Codes 50-55.He confirms these six profiles are added successfully.

Sample Task Flows 117

Page 118: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

118 About Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 119: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

11Setting Up Account

Reconciliation Manager

In This Chapter

Starting .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Setting Up Users .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Assigning Security Roles ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Assigning Access Rights .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Managing System Setup ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Managing Formats ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Managing Periods... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Managing Currency Rates ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Managing Custom Attributes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Starting

Note: The Shared Services server, the EPM Workspace server, and the Financial CloseManagement server must all be running before you launch Account ReconciliationManager. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installationand Configuration Guide.

To access Account Reconciliation Manager, log on to EPM Workspace and launch AccountReconciliation Manager.

ä To start Account Reconciliation Manager:

1 From a web browser, enter the URL for the Account Reconciliation Manager Log On page.

The URL is the web server host name, web server port, and workspace.

By default, the Workspace URL is http://Server name:9000/workspace/.

2 In the EPM Workspace logon dialog box, enter your system user name and password and click Log On.

If an error message indicates that the system cannot authenticate a user, verify theseconditions:

l The user is provisioned for the application. If not, use Shared Services to provision theuser.

Starting 119

Page 120: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l The user token or session is not timed out. If it has timed out, log off, and then log onto start a new session.

l The web server is configured and running. If there is a problem with the web server,contact the system administrator.

3 From EPM Workspace, select Navigate, then Applications, then Financial Close, and thenReconciliation Manager.

Setting Up UsersBefore working with Account Reconciliation Manager, you must set up users and assign securityroles.

To set up users, follow this process:

l Use Shared Services to create, authenticate, and manage users, groups, and roles.

l Use Shared Services to provision users with the Account Reconciliation Manager securityroles.

l Assign users access to required elements.

For information on using Shared Services, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise PerformanceManagement System User and Role Security Guide.

Assigning Security RolesAccess to Account Reconciliation Manager modules is dependent on user security roles and theprivileges given to the role. These security roles are available for Account ReconciliationManager:

Security Role Description

Administratorl Full access to System Setup, Filters, Attributes, Periods, Reconciliation Profiles, Reconciliation Instances, rates, and

Reporting.

l Cannot prepare or review account reconciliations.

l Add and remove their own comments.

l Remove comments from reconciliations to accommodate cases where commentary must be removed and thecommentary was entered by a user who is no longer with the company.

l Create Report Binders

Power Userl Full access to filters, Reconciliation Profiles, Reconciliation Instances, and Reporting.

l Add and remove their own comments.

l Remove commentary from reconciliations to accommodate cases where commentary must be removed and thecommentary was entered by a user who is no longer with the company.

l Create Report Binders

120 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 121: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Security Role Description

Preparerl Perform all functions related to preparation, including adding, editing, and removing transactions; flagging

transactions; adding comments; removing comments he previously added; adding attachments; removing attachmentshe previously added; answering Questions; and submitting reconciliations for review.

l Create Report Binders for their reconciliations

l Create private filters

Reviewerl Review, including flagging transactions; adding comments; removing comments he previously added; rejecting

reconciliations; and approving reconciliations.

l Create Report Binders for their reconciliations

l Create private filters

Commentatorl Add comments to reconciliations and the associated reconciliation transactions. This access is only to reconciliations

assigned with commentator privileges

l Create Report Binders for their reconciliations

l Create private filters

Viewerl Read-only access to reconciliations to which he is assigned Viewer privileges.

l Create Report Binders for their reconciliations

l Create private filters

You assign security roles in Oracle Hyperion Shared Services Console, which displays a list ofusers and groups from your external authentication provider. You can assign security roles togroups or individuals.

ä To assign security roles:

1 From EPM Workspace, select Navigate, then Administer, and then Shared Services Console to accessOracle Hyperion Shared Services.

2 Expand the User Directories folder, and then expand the directory where the users reside.

3 Perform an action:

l To assign security roles to a user, select Users.

l To assign security roles to a group, select Group.

4 Search for and select a user or group.

5 Provision the user using one of these methods:

l Right-click and select Provision.

l Select Administration , and then Provision.

l Click Provision.

6 From Available Roles, expand Financial Close Management.

7 Select Account Reconciliation Manager, and expand to an Account Reconciliation Manager role, clickthe arrow button to add the role to the user, and then click Save.

8 Review the summary report and click OK.

Assigning Security Roles 121

Page 122: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Assigning Access RightsThe functions a user is authorized to perform in Account Reconciliation Manager aredetermined by the roles authorized for the user. Certain roles limit the objects that the user caninteract with; these object limitation security settings occur within Account ReconciliationManager.

You can give access rights to users for modules and data. For example, you can allow only certaingroups of users the ability to view, create, or change certain data or invoke certain methods. Or,you can prevent components from rendering based on the user role. After the user isauthenticated, the application can determine whether or not to grant that user access to an objector module based his role.

The types of activity rights a user has for an object establish the access rights to that object.

l Preparer—Has write access to assigned reconciliations and can submit reconciliations forreview.

l Reviewer—Has write access to the Status (Approve or Reject) of assigned reconciliations andcan add comments. Has read access for the rest.

l Commentator—Has write access to add comments and read access for the rest.

l Viewer—Has read access to reconciliations.

ModulesDifferent functions are enabled based on the User role in Workspace.

DataTwo types of data objects have data security for Account Reconciliation Manager:

l Profiles

l Reconciliations

Three security settings exist:

l VIEW—Users can read and view data.

l MODIFY—Users can modify the data but cannot create or delete data.

l CREATE—Users can create and delete data.

The types of activity rights a user has for an object establish the access rights to that object.

l Preparer—Has write access to assigned reconciliations and can submit reconciliations forreview.

l Reviewer—Has write access to the Status (Approve or Reject) of assigned reconciliations andcan add comments. Has read access for the rest.

l Commentator—Has write access to add comments and read access for the rest.

122 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 123: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Viewer—Has read access to reconciliations.

Managing System Setup

Subtopics

l Managing Profile Segments

l Managing Frequencies

l Defining Currency

l Editing System Attributes

l Setting Power User Security

l Managing Aging Profiles

Managing Profile Segments

Subtopics

l Creating Profile Segments

l Editing Profile Segments

l Deleting Profile Segments

When defining profiles in Account Reconciliation Manager, the profile account ID is stored insegments to facilitate filtering and reporting on the values. The number of profile segments isconfigurable and unlimited. For example, the account ID 100-1200-ABC contains three profilesegments.

You can specify different types for profile segments:

l Numeric—Values ranging from 0-9. Number segments should be used for segments thatrequire only numeric values.

l Text—Numbers, letters, and most special characters. You use hyphens (-) to delimit profilesegments and are therefore restricted from use as a segment value. Use Text segments whensegment values are not restricted to a defined list and may contain a wide range of values.

l List type—Values entered into the profile segment are predefined and should be restrictedto an authorized set of values.

Creating Profile SegmentsAdministrators can add, edit, or remove profile segments only when no profiles exist. Therefore,customers must define profile segments once, during implementation.

ä To create profile segments:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectProfile Segments.

2 Select Actions, and then New.

Managing System Setup 123

Page 124: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 Enter the Name and select the Profile Segment Type. For List Type, enter the list values.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Save or Save and Close.

Editing Profile Segments

ä To edit profile segments:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectProfile Segments, and then select a profile segment.

2 Select Actions, and then Edit.

3 Change Name and Type.

4 Click OK.

Deleting Profile Segments

ä To delete profile segments:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectProfile Segments, and then select a profile segment.

2 Select Actions, and then Delete.

Managing Frequencies

Subtopics

l Creating Frequencies

l Deleting Frequencies

Frequencies are associated with profiles and reconciliations and periods and determine howoften reconciliations must be prepared and reviewed.

Common frequencies include Monthly, Quarterly, and Annually. The names of frequencies donot matter, can be changed at any time, and do not affect processing of reconciliations. However,frequencies are hierarchical, and the order in which they are listed in the frequencies table isimportant. They should be listed in order of most frequent to least frequent . When associatingfrequencies with periods, the list order is used to determine which frequencies should also beincluded in each period.

124 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 125: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating Frequencies

ä To create Frequencies:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectFrequencies.

2 Select Actions, and then New.

3 Enter the name of the frequency. For example: Monthly, Quarterly.

4 Click Save or Save and Close.

Deleting Frequencies

ä To delete Frequencies:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectFrequencies.

2 Select a frequency and select Actions, and then Delete.

If the frequency is in use by other items, a message is displayed: “One or more of the itemsselected for modification are in use by other items and cannot be modified at this time. Selectan item to see the list of items which are using it.” Click Close.

3 Click Save or Save and Close.

Defining Currency

Subtopics

l Defining Currency Buckets

l Defining Rate Types

Defining Currency BucketsThe currency buckets setup options determine whether Account Reconciliation Manager isconfigured for one currency environment (for companies that transact only in one currency)or a multiple currency environment (for companies that maintain account balances in multiplecurrencies). You can have up to three currency buckets; for example, Entered, Functional, andReporting.

ä To define Currency Buckets:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectCurrency.

2 Select a currency bucket for Balances and Transactions data:

l Single currency—Select the currency code to be assigned to all balances and transactions.

Managing System Setup 125

Page 126: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Multiple currencies. Select the label for the currency bucket:

m Entered—Report balances and transactions in the currencies in which theyoccurred.

m Functional—Report balances and transactions in the currency associated with theentity that owns the account.

m Reporting—Report balances and transactions in the currency used for system-widereporting.

3 Select whether you want to enable the currency bucket.

4 Select a default currency; for example, US Dollar (USD).

5 Click Save or Save and Close.

Defining Rate TypesRate types are associated with foreign exchange rates for use with profiles or reconciliations. InAccount Reconciliation Manager, you should configure only those rate types used for periodend balance translation in the source systems being reconciled.

When foreign exchange rates are imported from source systems, they are associated with a ratetype. Profiles and reconciliations that require foreign exchange translation should be assigneda rate type that matches the rate type used for balance translation in the source system. WhenAccount Reconciliation Manager calculates foreign currency transaction values in areconciliation, it uses the rates associated with the rate type assigned to the reconciliation.

Creating Rate Types

ä To create Rate Types:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectCurrency, and then select the Rate Types tab.

2 Select Actions, and then Add.

3 Enter:

l Rate Type—

Enter a unique name for the Rate Type.

l Source System—

If importing currency rates from ERP Integrator, select the Source System; for example,Oracle GL.

l Source System Rate Type—

If importing currency rates from ERP Integrator, select the rate type; for example, OracleGL Corporate.

l From ERPI—

If the data is from ERP Integrator, this column displays a check mark .

126 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 127: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

4 Click Save or Save and Close.

Deleting Rate Types

You can delete a rate type if it is not in use.

ä To delete Rate Types:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectCurrency, and then select the Rate Types tab.

2 Select the rate type. Select Actions, and then Delete.

3 Click Save or Save and Close.

Editing System AttributesSystem Attributes are the standard set of attributes included with Account ReconciliationManager:

l Process—Associated with profiles and reconciliations and enable classification of profilesand reconciliations according to the purpose for which reconciliations are performed.Common processes include the balance sheet reconciliation processes, the consolidationsystem reconciliation process, and the local GAAP reconciliation process.

l Risk Rating—Associated with profiles and reconciliations and enable classification of profilesand reconciliations according to risk level. Risk ratings can be used to select accounts forreporting, or to facilitate assignment of preparers, frequencies, or other attributes.

l Account Types—Associated with profiles and reconciliations, account types enableclassification of profiles, reconciliations, and adjustments according to a hierarchicalstructure that defines:

m The nature of the account (for example, asset, liability, or equity)

m Subclassifications (for example, current assets and noncurrent assets)

m Specific account types (for example, cash)

To achieve the maximum benefit, configure account types to match the structure that isused for financial reporting.

l Maximum Attachment Size—Determines the maximum file size that Account ReconciliationManager users are allowed to upload in Account Reconciliation Manager. This settingprovides Administrators with flexibility in adapting Account Reconciliation Manager towork within limitations of the environment in which it is installed.

You can change the current maximum files size. In the drop-down list, the values shownstart at the default of 5 MB, with incremental values of 5 MB up to 100 MB.

l Due Date Reminder Notification—Account Reconciliation Manager sends email remindersto preparers and reviewers when:

1. Responsibility for reconciliations changes to the preparer or reviewer

Managing System Setup 127

Page 128: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

2. A due date is approaching for reconciliations. (You must configure the number of daysin advance of the due date)

3. A due date is missed

Notifications pertaining to the previous items 1 and 3 require no additional configuration.Account Reconciliation Manager determines when to send notifications based oninformation contained within the reconciliations.

l Data Load Context—Specifies the logical context to use for Oracle Hyperion Data IntegrationManagement (ODI). This logical context contains the database connections needed forimporting balances and FX rates from source systems.

ä To edit system attributes:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectSystem Attributes.

2 Select an attribute, then click Edit .

3 To change the name of the attribute, select it and then edit the name.

4 To add a value, select Actions, and then select Add. Enter the value.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Save or Save and Close.

Setting Power User SecurityPower Users have administrative capabilities within Account Reconciliation Manager limitedto administering authorized sets of profiles and reconciliations. This feature is designed forcompanies with distributed reconciliation processes that require participation of employeesfamiliar with local operations in the configuration of profiles and reconciliations.

The authorization occurs through the use of security filters on account segments. For example,Power User A might be granted authorization only to profiles or reconciliations where segmentone = 100 and segment two starts with 12. Security filters are created and assigned to each PowerUser. See “Filtering Views” on page 54.

128 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 129: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Managing Aging Profiles

Subtopics

l Creating Aging Profiles

l Deleting Aging Profiles

l Editing Aging Buckets

l Deleting Aging Buckets

Aging profiles contain the definition of aging buckets that are used in Account ReconciliationManager dashboards to report on the age of reconciliation transactions. Account ReconciliationManager includes a predefined aging profile that contains these aging buckets:

l 0-30 days

l 31-60 days

l 61-90 days

l 91-180 days

l Over 180 days

Additional aging profiles can be defined to support aging policies.

Creating Aging Profiles

ä To create Aging Profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectAging Profiles.

2 Select Actions, and then New.

3 Enter an Aging Profile Name.

4 For each aging bucket in the aging profile:

a. Click Add .

b. Enter these fields:

l Label: Enter a label for each range of days; for example, 0-30 days, 31-60 days,61-90 days.

l Start Day: Enter the first day of the range; for example, 0.

l End Day: Enter the last day of the range; for example, 30.

Managing System Setup 129

Page 130: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

5 Click OK.

Deleting Aging Profiles

ä To delete Aging Profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectAging Profiles.

2 Select an aging profile.

3 Click Delete .

Editing Aging Buckets

ä To edit Aging Buckets:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectAging Profiles.

2 Select an Aging Profile.

3 Click Edit .

4 Make the changes, and then click OK.

130 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 131: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Deleting Aging Buckets

ä To delete Aging Buckets:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then System Setup. In System Setup, selectAging Profiles.

2 Select an Aging Profile.

3 Click Edit .

4 Select an Aging Bucket.

5 Click Delete.

6 Click OK.

Managing Formats

Subtopics

l Creating Formats

l Deleting Formats

Reconciliation formats determine the method of reconciliation and the information that mustbe provided by the preparer before the reconciliation can be sent on for review. Formats areconfigured by administrators and assigned to profiles. Formats cannot be changed on existingreconciliations. First, delete the reconciliation, then change the format on the profile, and copythe changed profile into the period.

On each of the Format tabs, click Save, Save and Close, or Cancel.

Creating Formats

Subtopics

l Setting Format Properties

l Specifying Format Instructions

l Adding Format Attributes

l Specifying Format Questions

l Viewing Format History

Setting Format Properties

ä To create formats:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, click Manage, and then Formats.

2 Click New .

Managing Formats 131

Page 132: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 In the Properties tab, enter:

l Name

l Description

l Reconciliation Method

m Account Analysis—The balance in the general ledger is substantiated through a listingof transactions that should comprise the ending balance. This list of transactions iscalled the Explained Balance, and it is compared to the General Ledger Balance. Ifthere is a Difference, the preparer uses the Explained Balance and Adjustments tabsto record adjustments to get the unexplained difference down to zero. Examples ofaccounts: prepaids, accruals, reserves, and intangibles. The key to a high-qualityaccount analysis is to ensure that the list of explained balance transactions includessufficient detail to justify all items.

In the Label column, assign names that are meaningful to the users. The label namesappear in the Balance Summary section of reconciliations.

m Balance Comparison—The balance in the general ledger can be substantiated bycomparing it to a balance from another source. That source might be a subledger,a bank statement, a system report, or a spreadsheet containing a complexcalculation.

When a preparer reconciles an account using this format, he sees the Source SystemBalance, the Subsystem Balance, and the Difference between the two. If there is adifference, the preparer must record an adjustment on the System Adjustments orSubsystem Adjustments tabs.

Account Reconciliation Manager then calculates the Adjustments to SourceSystem and Adjusted Source System Balance, and subtracts those two to calculatethe Unexplained Difference.

In the Label column, assign names that are meaningful to the users.

Select Hide for rows that you wish to exclude from the reconciliation. For example,if the Subsystem Balance can never be wrong, on the Properties tab, hideAdjustments to Subsystem and Adjusted Subsystem Balance to prevent users fromadding these types of transactions.

l Require 0 unexplained difference:

Depending on the chosen method of reconciliation, the reconciliation calculates theunexplained difference as:

m For Account Analysis Formats: The Source System Balance, less the ExplainedBalance, and less the Adjustments.

m For Balance Comparison Formats: The Source System Balance, less the SubsystemBalance, less the Adjustments to Source system, and less the Adjustments toSubsystem.

Administrators can specify whether the format requires a 0 unexplained difference. Ifit does, the preparer is prevented from submitting the reconciliation for review until

132 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 133: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

adjustments are created for the full difference between the source system balance andthe explained/subsystem balance.

Adding Transaction Attributes

Transaction Attributes determine the information that the Preparer provides when transactionsare entered into the reconciliation. Transaction Attributes appear in the Reconciliation dialog,in the Transaction Detail tab.

ä To add transaction attributes:

1 In New Format, select an attributes tab; for example, Explained Balance or Adjustments.

2 Click Add.

3 Enter:

l Attribute

Select an attribute from the list of defined attributes; for example: Accrual Category orAction Plan.

l Type

This is a noneditable field and is populated by the attribute type.

l Value

Select a value associated with the type of attribute.

l If this format attribute is required, select Required.

4 Click OK.

Specifying Format InstructionsAdministrators provide instructions on how to use the format. These instructions can includetext-based instructions, URL links, attached files, or links to files in document repositories. Theseinstructions are merged with profile instructions and presented on the reconciliation.

ä To specify instructions:

1 In New Format, select the Instructions tab.

2 In Instructions, enter instruction text.

ä To add a reference:

1 In the References section, click Add .

2 From the Type list, select one of these types:

l Local File

Click Browse to select and attach the file, enter a Name, and click OK. The file size isspecified in System Attributes. See “Editing System Attributes” on page 127.

Managing Formats 133

Page 134: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l URL

Enter a URL name, then enter the URL, for example: Oracle, http://www.oracle.com,and click OK.

l Optional: Repository File

From the file list, select the file, and click OK.

Note: The Repository File option is only displayed if Financial Close Management isconfigured with Oracle Enterprise Content Management.

Tip: To delete a reference, select the reference, and click Delete.

Adding Format AttributesFormat Attributes pertain to the overall reconciliation and enable capture of additionalinformation, such as Time to Prepare, or Time to Review. Format Attributes appear in theReconciliation dialog, underneath the Balance Summary table on the Summary tab.

ä To add an attribute assignment:

1 In New Format, select the Attributes tab.

2 Select Actions, and then Add.

3 Enter:

l Attribute:

Select an attribute from the list of defined attributes; for example: Formatted Number,List, User, or Yes/No.

l Type:

This noneditable field is populated by the attribute type.

l Value:

Select a value associated with the type of attribute; for example: a numeric value forFormatted Number attribute, a List for List attribute, a name of a person, User, or Yesor No for the Yes/No attribute.

l Updatable By:

Select the roles that can update the attribute (Preparer, Reviewer, or Both).

l If this format attribute is required, select Required.

4 Click OK.

Specifying Format QuestionsAdministrators can also configure certification questions that the preparer must respond tobefore they are allowed to submit the reconciliation for review. For example, if your policy

134 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 135: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

requires that the user clear adjustments within 60 days, then you might consider adding acertification question that asks, “Have you cleared all adjustments older than 60 days? – Yes orNo”. Administrators can add as many certification questions as needed, and can add questionsfor each Format.

ä To specify questions:

1 In New Format, select the Questions tab.

2 Click New.

3 From the New Question dialog box, for Question, enter the text for the question.

4 From the Type list, select a question types:

l Date

l Date and Time

l List:

If you select List, enter a list of valid responses to the question.

l Integer

l Number:

If you select Number, select number formatting options

m For Decimal Places, enter a value for the number of decimal places to display.

m Select the Thousands Separator option if you want numbers to display a thousandsseparator (for example, 1,000.00)

m From the Currency Symbol list, select a currency symbol, for example, Dollars ($).

m From the Negative Number list, select how to display negative numbers, forexample, (123).

m From the Scale list, select a scale value for numbers, for example, 1000.

l Text

l True/False

l User

l Yes/No

5 If the question is required, select Required.

6 Click OK.

7 Optional: To change the order of questions, select a question, then select Actions, and then Move toTop, Move Up, Move Down, or Move to Bottom.

Tip: To edit a question, select the question and click Edit. To remove a question, select thequestion and click Delete.

8 Click Save and Close.

Managing Formats 135

Page 136: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Viewing Format HistoryThe History tab captures an audit trail of changes to the format configuration.

ä To view format history:

1 Select Manage, then Formats.

2 Double-click a format.

3 Select the History tab. You can view these fields:

l Field Name—The name of the field that was changed.

l Modification Type—The type of modification that occurred.

l Modified On—The date the modification occurred.

l Modified By—The person who did the modification.

l Old Value—The original field value.

l New Value—The value the field was changed to.

l Details—Details about the history record.

Deleting FormatsYou cannot delete formats that are currently assigned to Profiles. First, remove the format fromthe profiles, then delete it. You can delete formats that are assigned to reconciliations(Reconciliations point to a snapshot of the format, not to the format itself).

ä To delete formats:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, click Manage, and then Formats.

2 Select a format and click Delete.

3 Click Yes or No to the question, “Are you sure you want to delete the format (NAME).”

4 Click Close.

Managing Periods

Subtopics

l Creating Periods

l Running Auto-Reconciliations

l Viewing Period History

l Editing Periods

l Deleting Periods

Periods are associated with reconciliations and determine the as of date of the reconciliation.Every period has a start date, end date, and close date. The close date is the date on which books

136 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 137: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

are closed for the period. Periods also have associated frequencies. When profiles are added toperiods, only those profiles with a frequency matching a frequency associated with the periodare added to the period as a reconciliation.

Periods are initially set with a status of Pending and prohibit work from proceeding onreconciliations. Administrators must change the status to Open, which allows work to begin onreconciliations after the reconciliation start date is reached. After the period is finished,administrators change the period to Closed, which prohibits new reconciliations from beingadded to the period. However, work can continue on reconciliations and users can importupdated balances. After work has concluded, periods may be locked, which prohibits all changesto the reconciliations. Users cannot add reconciliations to the period, changes cannot be madeto reconciliations, and balances cannot be imported.

If circumstances require changes to reconciliations, or administrators must import updatedbalances, administrators may re-open Periods.

Creating Periods

ä To create a Period:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, click Manage, and then Periods.

2 Click New.

3 On the Properties Tab, enter:

l Name

l Start Date

l End Date

l Close Date

l Frequency

Select a frequency from the list of defined frequencies.

l Includes:

Lists what the frequency contains. For example, if you selected a frequency ofAnnually, then Includes lists Quarterly and Monthly.

4 Click OK.

Running Auto-ReconciliationsRunning auto-reconciliation changes the status from Open with Preparer to Closed.

ä To run auto-reconciliations:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, click Manage, and then Periods.

Managing Periods 137

Page 138: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

2 Select a period, then click Auto-Reconcile . A message displays, “A request to auto-reconcile issubmitted successfully.”

3 To see the auto-reconciliation status, click Refresh to update the status of the auto-reconciliationfor a particular period in the Auto-Reconciliation Running column.

If the request fails, a message “Failed to start the auto-reconciliation. Please check thebusiness events configuration on your system.” displays.

Viewing Period History

ä To view period history:

1 Select Manage, then Periods.

2 Double-click a period.

3 Select the History tab.

4 When you finish, click OK or Cancel.

Editing Periods

ä To edit a Period:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then Periods.

2 Select a Period and click Edit.

3 Edit the fields and then click OK.

Deleting Periods

ä To delete a Period:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then Periods.

2 Select a Period and click Delete.

138 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 139: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Managing Currency Rates

Subtopics

l Importing Currency Rates

l Creating Currency Rates

l Editing Currency Rates

l Deleting Currency Rates

Currency Rates may be imported using ERP Integrator, imported from a CSV file, or createdmanually.

Importing Currency Rates

ä To import currency rates:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then select Currency Rates.

2 Select Actions, and then Import .

l Enter the file name or click Browse to navigate to a currency rate folder.

l For Import Type, click Replace or Replace All.

3 Click Import.

4 Click Close.

Creating Currency Rates

ä To create currency rates:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then select Currency Rates.

2 Click New.

3 Enter:

l Period

l Rate Types

l From Currency

l To Currency

l Rate

Managing Currency Rates 139

Page 140: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Editing Currency Rates

ä To edit currency rates:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then select Currency Rates.

2 Click Edit.

3 Edit the currency rate and then click OK.

4 Click Close.

Deleting Currency Rates

ä To delete currency rates:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then select Currency Rates.

2 Select a currency and then click Delete.

3 Click Close.

Managing Custom Attributes

Subtopics

l Creating Custom Attributes

l Duplicating Custom Attributes

l Editing Custom Attributes

l Deleting Custom Attributes

Custom attributes are user-defined fields. They are defined centrally by administrators and canbe used in many places, including:

l On Profiles: Administrators and power users can assign custom attributes to profiles tocapture information that is not supported by the standard attributes.

l On Formats: Administrators can assign custom attributes to formats to appear onreconciliations in one of two places.

m In the reconciliation summary section, to capture reconciliation-level information fromthe preparer or reviewer (Format Attributes)

m On transactions associated with the reconciliation, including adjustments and balanceexplanations; values for these custom attributes are provided by the preparer and areintended to ensure that the reconciliation contains sufficient information to justify thebalance (Transaction Attributes)

140 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 141: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating Custom Attributes

ä To create a custom attribute:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then Custom Attributes.

2 Click New.

3 Enter the name of the attribute and select the type.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Close.

Duplicating Custom Attributes

ä To duplicate a custom attribute:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then Custom Attributes.

2 Click Duplicate .

3 Select the duplicate attribute and click Edit.

4 Edit Name. The Type is not editable.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Close.

Editing Custom Attributes

ä To edit custom attributes:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then select Custom Attributes.

2 Select an attribute, then click Edit.

3 Click OK.

4 Click Close.

Deleting Custom Attributes

ä To delete custom attributes:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then select Custom Attributes.

2 Select an attribute and click Delete.

3 Click Close.

Managing Custom Attributes 141

Page 142: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

142 Setting Up Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 143: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

12Navigating in Account

Reconciliation Manager

In This Chapter

Account Reconciliation Manager Views ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Filtering Views ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Viewing Summary Information ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Reconciliation Status ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Account Reconciliation Manager ViewsYou can use List views or the Dashboard view to present records for on screen viewing and toprovide drill-down capabilities to record details.

List ViewsList views exist for profiles, reconciliations, and transactions. The primary objective of list viewsis to present records for on screen viewing and to provide drill-down capabilities to record details.

l Profile List View—For Administrators and Power Users. Contains the list of profiles andprovides drill-down to the Profile dialog.

l Reconciliation List View—Contains the list of reconciliations and provides drill-down tothe Reconciliation dialog

l Transaction List View—Contains the list of transactions and provides drill-down to theReconciliation dialog, with the focus set on the Transaction Detail tab

List views provide these reporting features:

l Columns can be added to or removed from the view and re-ordered.

l Filters can be applied to limit the records included in the list.

l List views can be printed or exported to Excel for ad-hoc reporting.

Dashboard ViewDashboards enable users to focus attention on key statistics and record sets throughconfiguration of dashboard “portlets”. Up to four portlets can be displayed at a time, or oneportlet can be maximized for full-screen viewing. Five types of portlets are provided:

Account Reconciliation Manager Views 143

Page 144: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Status Chart—

Provides a clear indication of the status of the reconciliation program, identifying numberof reconciliations that are Pending, Open with Preparer or Reviewer, or Closed. It alsoidentifies the number of reconciliations that are Late or that contain Warnings.

l Aging Analysis

Displays the number of transactions that fall into various aging buckets. This dashboard istypically used to report the aging of reconciliation adjustments to ensure adjustments arebeing cleared within a timely fashion. The dashboard may also be used to age thecomposition of certain account balances, an effective technique to ensure accounts likeprepaids and accruals contain valid balances.

l Reconciliation List

Displays lists of reconciliations; the objective of this portlet is to allow users to apply filtersto focus attention on subsets of reconciliations, such as high risk reconciliations, orreconciliations with warnings.

l Transaction List

Monitors transactions across reconciliations. Through the application of filters, theTransaction List can be used to monitor reconciliation adjustments and facilitate verificationthat correction entries were booked.

l My Worklist

Contains the list of reconciliations assigned to the user as preparer or reviewer; the objectiveof this portlet is to facilitate workflow by reminding the user of the work assigned.

Selecting ViewsYou can select to view the Dashboard, or one of the three List Views (Profiles, Reconciliations,or Transactions).

ä To select a view, perform an action:

l Select View, and then select a view.

l From the toolbar, click a button for the view:

m Dashboard

m Profile List

m Reconciliation List

m Transaction List

144 Navigating in Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 145: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Available View ActionsIn the Dashboard, Profile List, Reconciliation List, and Transaction List, your can perform theseactions:

l Left-click: Highlights the record. The Information Panel at the bottom of the screen thenupdates to display the profile, reconciliation, or transaction information.

l Right-click: Displays a context-sensitive menu that enables you to perform certain actions.Menu contents vary depending on the status and security role.

l Change View: Click a toolbar button to change view type.

l Actions: This drop down menu enables you to perform certain actions. The menu contentsvary depending on the reconciliations and your security role:

m Status Chart: Open Period, Refresh, Print, Export to a Graph, Late status, or Warnings,Apply Filter, Remove Save Filter

m Reconciliation List: Open Period, Refresh, Print, Export to Microsoft Office Excel, ApplyFilter, Remove Saved Filter

m Aging Analysis: Open Period, Refresh, Print, Export to a PNG file, Apply Filter, RemoveSaved Filter

m Transaction List: Open Period, Refresh, Print, Export To Excel, Apply Filter, RemoveSaved Filter

l View: This drop-down list box enables you to show and hide parts of the view.

l Columns: The column arrows enable you to sort columns by ascending or descending order.Change the column widths by dragging the right side of each column.

l Period: The Profile List, Reconciliation List, and Transaction List Views drop-down list boxenables you to select the Open Period for the view you select. The Profile List view displaysonly if a Balance attribute is displayed.

Filtering Views

Subtopics

l Creating Filters

l Editing Filters

l Duplicating Filters

l Deleting Filters

Filters allow users to control what records they see in list views, dashboards, and report binders.You can apply filters against profiles, reconciliations, or reconciliation transaction attributes,including system and custom attributes. All users can save private filters for future use by theuser who created it. Administrators and power users can also save public filters accessible by allusers.

The filter panel provides two modes for building filters:

Filtering Views 145

Page 146: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Basic—The basic filter mode exposes access to all filterable attributes and allows the user toprovide values for the attributes they wish to filter on and the operand to use for filtering.Typical operands include: equal to, not equal to, starts with, ends with, contains, greaterthan, less than, etc. The list of operands available depends on the data type of the attribute.For example, operands for filtering text values are different than the operands for filteringnumeric values. Filters configured in basic mode are combined together using “and” logic,which means only those records that meet all filter criteria are displayed.

l Advanced—The advanced filter mode enables configuration of more complex filters using“and” and “or” logic and grouping logic to determine the order in which filters are applied.Like the basic filter mode, the advanced filter exposes access to all filter attributes.

Creating Filters

ä To create filters:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, navigate to one of these:

l On the menu, select Manage, and then Filters.

l On the Profile List, select Reconciliation List or Transaction List views.

2 On the Filter panel, click Manage Filters .

3 Click New.

4 Enter:

l Name

l Description

l Type—Select one account type:

m Profile

m Reconciliation

m Transaction

l Public

Select if anyone can view this filter.

l Filter Definition

A group of conditions that limit the list of account profiles or reconciliations

l Condition

You can define the properties of a condition or group:

m Conjunction

Select And or Or. These state how this condition or group relate to prior siblingconditions or groups. This field is enabled only if the selected node is not the firstchild of its parent node.

m Attribute Source

146 Navigating in Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 147: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Appears only for Filters of type Reconciliation. Select Profile, Balance, orTransaction. The selection of the Attribute Source affects the list of attributespresented in the Attribute drop-down list. By default, Profile is selected.

m Attribute—A list of all available attributes for the filter. By default, Name is theattribute selected.

m Operand—States what kind of evaluation to perform against the attribute.

m Value—Specifies what values to compare the attribute against. The type of attributedetermines what input field is available.

5 Click OK.

Editing Filters

ä To edit filters:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, navigate to one of these:

l On the menu, select Manage, and then Filters.

l On the Profile List, Reconciliation List, or Transaction List views.

2 On the Filter panel, click Manage Filters .

3 Select a filter.

4 Click Edit.

5 Edit the filter.

6 To reset a filter to the original definition, from the Filter panel, click Reset .

7 To save:

l From the Edit Filter dialog box, click OK.

l From the Filter panel on a View list, click Save .

Duplicating Filters

ä To duplicate filters:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, on the Filter panel, click Manage Filters , or on the menu,select Manage, and then Filters.

2 Select a filter, then click Duplicate.

3 Select the duplicated filter, then select Actions, and then Edit.

4 Make your changes and then click OK.

Filtering Views 147

Page 148: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Deleting Filters

ä To delete filters:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, on the Filter panel, click Manage Filters .

2 Select a filter.

3 Click Delete and then click Close.

Viewing Summary InformationWhen you select a view in the Profile, Reconciliation, and Transaction List views, you can viewinformation from the panel at the bottom of the view pane:

l Profile List—Displays the properties, workflow, and instruction details

l Reconciliation List—Displays properties, workflow, and transactions

l Transaction List—Displays the properties, descriptions, and comments

ä To view summary information, from a Profile, Reconciliation, or Transaction List view,select a line item.

l To expand and collapse the panes, click on the black triangles on either side of the pane bars.

l To resize the panes, hover over the pane, click to grasp a side, and then drag it.

Reconciliation Status

Status Icon Description

Pending Reconciliations are initially set with a status of “Pending” and prohibit work from proceeding on reconciliations. Oncethe period is opened and the reconciliation start date is reached, the reconciliation status changes to “Open”, whichallows work to begin on reconciliations.

Open Reconciliation is with a preparer or reviewer

Late Reconciliation is late

Warnings Reconciliation has warnings

Closed Reconciliation is closed

148 Navigating in Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 149: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

13Managing Profiles

In This Chapter

Creating Profiles.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Editing Profiles .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Deleting Profiles.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Using Excel CSV Files for Profiles .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Using the Profile Actions Panel .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Profiles are the precursors to reconciliations. Profiles contain the configuration settings thatdetermine how and when reconciliations occur. Profiles are copied to periods, causing thecreation of reconciliations, which contain snapshots of the profiles at that point in time.

Administrators and authorized power users can update profiles and reconciliations as neededto change user assignments and attributes used for reporting. Attributes that affect the type ofreconciliation being performed (including formats and currency bucket configuration) cannotbe changed on reconciliations. If changes to these attributes must occur, the reconciliation mustfirst be deleted, and the changes must be applied to the profile directly. Then, the profile can becopied again to the period. This causes the creation of a new reconciliation which is a snapshotof the new profile configuration.

Profiles are associated with source system and subsystem balances through mapping rulesestablished in ERP Integrator.

The copy to period function can occur from two places:

l Manage Periods dialog box

l Profile List View

Creating Profiles

ä To create profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then select Profile List.

2 Select Actions, then New.

3 On the Properties tab, enter:

Creating Profiles 149

Page 150: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Account ID—The identifier for the profile is a required field. The combination of segmentvalues must be unique across profiles. The number of segments available is defined insystem setup.

l Name—The name provides a secondary mechanism to help identify the profile. Namesare not required to be unique. As a best practice, Oracle suggests using the nameassociated with the natural account segment and some other descriptor that identifiesownership of or responsibility for the profile.

l Description

l Process—Associates the profile with a specific reconciliation process, for example: thebalance sheet reconciliation process or the local GAAP reconciliation process. Processesare defined in system setup.

l Format—Associates the profile with a format created by an administrator, determiningthe method of reconciliation and the type of information required to be provided bythe preparer.

l Method—Identifies the reconciliation method associated with the format assigned tothe profile.

l Risk Rating—Associates the profile with a risk rating. Risk ratings are defined in systemsetup; for example, High, Low, or Medium.

l Account Type—Associates the profile with an account type. Risk Rating and AccountType are attributes that facilitate reporting – the values are defined by administratorsand can be used on dashboards and list views to filter reconciliations.

l Normal Balance—Identifies whether the profile is expected to contain a debit balance,a credit balance, or a debit or a credit balance. If the balance is different from the normalbalance, then a warning is set on the reconciliation.

l In the Auto-Reconciliation Methods section, enable one or both:

m Account has a 0 Balance: If an account analysis format is assigned to the profile,then the profile can be enabled for the “Account has a 0 Balance” auto-reconciliationmethod. If the balance associated with the reconciliation for a given period is 0, thenthe reconciliation is prepared and reviewed automatically for that period. If thebalance is not 0, then the reconciliation must be manually prepared and reviewed.

m Balance Comparison where the Balances Match—If a balance comparison format isassigned to the profile, then the profile can be enabled for the “Balance Comparisonwhere the Balances Match” auto-reconciliation method. If this method is enabled,then a threshold percentage can be applied. The threshold percentage is multipliedagainst the source system balance to calculate a threshold value. If the differencebetween the source system balance and the subsystem balance is less than thethreshold value in a given period, then the reconciliation is prepared and reviewedautomatically for that period. If the difference is greater than the threshold value,then the reconciliation must be manually prepared and reviewed. Enter theThreshold as a whole number between 1 and 100.

l Maximum Age Limits—Enter the number of Day(s) for the maximum age ofreconciliation transactions:

150 Managing Profiles

Page 151: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

m Reconciliation Adjustments (applies to Account Analysis and Balance Comparisonmethods)

m Balance Explanations (applies to Account Analysis method)

If a value is provided and the reconciliation contains transactions where the age of theitems (calculated as Period End Date minus Transaction Open Date) is greater than thevalue provided, then the transactions are flagged as aging violations and thereconciliation contains an aging violation warning.

l Manually Enter Balances—Determine whether the source system or subsystem balancescan be entered manually by the preparer on the reconciliation. These boxes should onlybe checked if balances are not being imported for the profile. Select one or both:

m Enter source system balances manually (applies to both reconciliation methods)

m Enter subsystem balances manually (applies to Balance Comparison method)

4 Select the Instructions tab.

Inherits instructions configured on the format assigned to the profile, eliminating the needto provide specific instructions for each and every profile. Some profiles, however, do requireextra instruction. Add the instructions as paragraphs of text, attached files, URLs, or linksto files in document repositories.

5 Select the Workflow tab.

The Workflow tab contains the preparer and reviewer assignments. Only users authorizedfor preparer and reviewer roles can be assigned these functions on a profile. AccountReconciliation Manager prevents the same user from being assigned preparer and reviewerroles on the same profile, or the same user being assigned multiple reviewer roles.

l Enter this information for the preparer:

m User Name—The user names available for selection as preparer are only those usersauthorized with the preparer role.

m Frequency—If a profile contains a frequency that matches one of the frequenciesassociated with a period, then the reconciliation is copied to the period when theadministrator uses the Copy to Period function. Frequency example: Annually,Quarterly, or Monthly

m Start Day Offset—Determines the start date of the reconciliation. It can be a negativeor positive number and determines the number of days before (if configured as anegative number) or after (if configured as a positive number) the period close datethe reconciliation is authorized to begin.

m Schedule From—Determines what day (for example, the close day or end day) theStart Day Offset relates to.

m Duration—Added to the start date to calculate the preparer due date.

l When assigning reviewers, start with the reviewer with the highest frequency. Enter thereviewers information:

m Level—Account Reconciliation Manager supports unlimited levels of review.

Creating Profiles 151

Page 152: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

m User Name—The user names available for selection as reviewers are only those usersauthorized with the reviewer role.

m Reviewer Frequency—Reviewer Frequency determines how often the reconciliationis reviewed. It is possible for reconciliations to be prepared monthly and reviewedquarterly. The frequency of review cannot be more frequent than the frequency ofpreparation. Subsequent reviews cannot be more frequent than preceding reviews.

m Reviewer Duration—Reviewer duration determines the reviewer due date. The duedate is calculated as preparer start date + preparer duration + reviewer duration.There is no start day offset for reviewers. This is because the reviewer start date isdetermined by when the preparer releases the reconciliation for review. As soon asthis occurs, the reviewer may commence review.

6 Select the Currency tab.

Determines the number of currency buckets enabled for the reconciliation and the behaviorof foreign exchange translation. Enter this information:

l Historical Rate—Select Historical Rate for profiles that contain accounts not subject torevaluation in the source system:

m If Historical Rate is selected, the preparer must specify the value in all currencybuckets enabled on the reconciliation when entering transactions into thereconciliation (for example, balance explanations or adjustments).

m If Historical Rate is cleared, the preparer is required to enter a value into the lowestlevel currency bucket (for example, the entered currency bucket), and AccountReconciliation Manager calculates the equivalent value in the other currencybuckets using exchange rates maintained in Account Reconciliation Manager.

l Rate Type

The rate type selection applies only if the historical rate is cleared. When ForeignCurrency Rates (FX rates) are loaded into Account Reconciliation Manager, they areassociated with a rate type. The rate type setting on the profile determines which seriesof FX rates are used to perform currency conversion calculations for transactions ofreconciliations pertaining to the profile.

l For each bucket label (for example, Entered, Functional, or Reporting), enable it andselect the default currency.

l The currency bucket table determines which currency buckets are enabled for theprofile. Currency buckets are configured in system setup, and only those buckets enabledat a system level can be enabled for individual profiles. If a currency bucket is enabled,then a default currency can be assigned to the profile, by accepting the system-leveldefault for that bucket, or by assigning a profile-specific default value.

7 Select the Access tab.

Determines which users are authorized as commentators or viewers of reconciliationsrelated to the profile. Commentators are allowed to view the reconciliations and addcomments to the reconciliation or to transactions of the reconciliation. Viewers have read-only access.

152 Managing Profiles

Page 153: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

8 Select the Attributes tab.

Enables administrators to assign custom attributes to profiles and provide values for theattributes. The custom attributes are presented in read-only format on the reconciliation inthe Additional Properties section. Attributes must exist before they can be assigned to aprofile.

9 Review the History tab.

Captures an audit trail of changes to the Profile, including changes in workflow assignments,changes in format configuration, risk rating, or profile attributes.

10 Click Save and Close.

Editing Profiles

ä To edit profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then Profile List.

2 Select a profile, then Actions, and then Edit.

3 When you finish your edits, click Save and Close.

Deleting Profiles

ä To delete profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then Profile List.

2 Select a profile, then Actions, and then Delete.

3 Click Save and Close.

Using Excel CSV Files for ProfilesAdministrators and Power Users can configure profiles in Excel and then import them intoAccount Reconciliation Manager. The process looks like this:

1. Export a profile list to create an import template that creates a spreadsheet with the columnheadings.

2. Copy and paste the profile information into it.

3. Import the file.

Editing Profiles 153

Page 154: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Exporting Profiles

ä To export profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then select Profile List.

2 Select profiles, then select Actions. and then Export.

Optional: Filter the Profile List to include only the profiles that you want to export.

3 From Export Profiles select:

l Rows

Select one:

m All profiles to export all profiles that meet the current filter criteria

m Selected profiles to export the currently selected profiles

l Format

Select one:

m Formatted data (visible columns only) to export to an Excel compatible format

m Unformatted data for future import to export to CSV format for future import

4 Click Export.

5 Click Open or Save to save the file to your hard drive.

6 On Export Profiles, click Close.

Importing Profiles

ä To import profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then select Profile List.

2 Select Actions, and then Import.

3 On the Import Profiles dialog box, enter:

a. File

Enter or click Browse to locate the import file.

b. Import Type

Select one:

l Replace—Select this option to replace the definition of a profile with the definitionin the import file. This option replaces the profile detail with the detail that is inthe file that you are importing. It does not affect other profiles that are not specifiedin the import file.

l Update—Select this option to update partial information for profiles. AccountSegment values are required. For example, in the import file, you changed profile

154 Managing Profiles

Page 155: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

instructions or reassigned reviewers. You also made the same change to a largenumber of profiles; for example, adding a new attribute to 100 of 400 profiles. Thisoption is not a full replacement of the profile details. Only details for the attributesspecified in the file are updated. For example, if the import file has only a columnfor a profiles instructions, the preparer, reviewers, and other attributes are notaffected.

c. Click Import. An import summary status is displayed:

l If the import is successful, the Import Success dialog box displays the number ofprofiles imported.

l If the import generates errors, the profiles with errors are not imported, and theImport Errors dialog box identifies each error.

4 Click OK to save the profiles that were imported successfully and discard those that contained errors.

Copying and Pasting ProfilesYou can copy and paste to create duplicate profiles.

ä To copy profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then Profile List.

2 Select a profile.

3 Select Actions, and then Copy.

4 The Copy Profile window is displayed.

5 Click Save and Close or Cancel.

ä To paste profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then Profile List.

2 Select a profile, then select Actions, and then Paste.

3 See “Creating Profiles” on page 149 to complete the fields of the updated profile.

4 Click Save and Close or Cancel.

Using the Profile Actions Panel

Subtopics

l Performing Batch Updates

l Copying Profiles to Period

You can use the Actions panel to perform batch updates of profile attributes and workflow. Youcan update all profiles or a filtered subset of profiles.

Using the Profile Actions Panel 155

Page 156: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

For example, you have 500 profiles with John assigned as the preparer. Departmentalresponsibilities have changed, so you need to assign Mary as the preparer for those accounts.You filter the profile list to include only profiles for which John is the preparer, and then youuse the Actions panel to set Mary as the Preparer.

Performing Batch Updates

ä To perform batch updates:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then Profile List.

2 Select a filter, or set filters to define the profiles to update.

3 Open the Actions panel.

4 Optional: To update a subset of the displayed profiles, select the profiles in the Profile list.

5 To update profile attributes:

a. In the Set Attribute section, select an attribute from the list provided.

b. In Value, enter the new value for the attribute, or, if a list is available, select the valuefrom a list.

c. Click Set.

d. At the confirmation prompt, select whether to update all profiles that meet the currentfilter criteria or only the selected profiles, and then click Yes.

e. At the success message, click OK.

6 To add or update workflow information:

a. In Add/Set User, in Field, select the type of user to add or update; for example, Preparer,Reviewer, Commentator, or Viewer.

b. Specify the information to add or update.

c. Click Add.

d. At the confirmation prompt, select whether to update all profiles that meet the currentfilter criteria or only the selected profiles, and then click Yes.

e. At the success prompt, click OK.

7 To remove users from the workflow:

a. In Remove/Clear User, in Field, select the type of user to remove; for example, Preparer,Viewer, Commentator, or Viewer.

b. In Value, select the user to remove.

c. Click Remove.

d. At the confirmation prompt, select whether to remove the user from all profiles thatmeet the current filter criteria or only the selected profiles, and then click Yes.

e. At the success prompt, click OK.

8 To copy profiles to a period:

156 Managing Profiles

Page 157: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

a. In Copy to Period, select a period.

b. Click Apply.

c. Select the profiles to copy to the period:

l Selected Profiles (x), where x is the number of profiles selected

l All Profiles (x), where x is the total number of profiles

d. Click Apply.

This function is also accessible from Manage Periods.

Copying Profiles to Period

Note: You can also access Copy to Period in the Manage Periods dialog box. See “Copying Profilesto Periods” on page 161.

ä To copy profiles to periods:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, and then Profile List.

2 Select a profile. On the Actions panel, click Actions , and then click Copy to Period.

3 Select a period.

4 Click Apply.

The Copy to Period dialog box opens.

5 Select the profiles to copy to the period:

l Selected Profiles (x), where x is the number of profiles selected

l All Profiles (x), where x is the total number of profiles

6 Click Apply.

Using the Profile Actions Panel 157

Page 158: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

158 Managing Profiles

Page 159: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

14Managing Reconciliations

In This Chapter

Loading Balances ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Viewing Data Load Results .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Copying Profiles to Periods... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Identifying Missing Profiles.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Opening Periods... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Sending Notifications ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Viewing Reconciliations ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Performing Reconciliations... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Managing Reconciliation Workflow ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Loading BalancesERP Integrator manages Account Reconciliation Manager data loads. ERP Integrator includesdata adaptors to import balances and FX rates from certain general ledgers. These data adaptorsprovide direct connections into the general ledgers, avoiding the requirement to first export datainto flat files.

ERP Integrator also includes a flat file adaptor for loading balances from flat files, ensuring thatdata can be imported from subledgers and general ledgers for which no prebuilt adaptor isavailable. When a flat file adaptor is used to load balances, FX rates must be imported from aflat file as well. In this case, importation of FX rates occurs within Account ReconciliationManager, without using features of ERP Integrator.

ä To load balance data:

1 Set up ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager data load. See the Oracle® Hyperion FinancialData Quality Management ERP Integration Adapter for Oracle Applications guide.

2 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage, and then Periods.

3 Select a period, then select Actions, and then Load Data.

Data Load contains a history of data loads, reporting the start date, end date, the user whoexecuted it, the status, and the result. The status report shows subprocesses and the statusof each:

l Staging—The staging process extracts balances from the source system, assigns theprofile ID and balance type, and stores the balances in a temporary staging table. Within

Loading Balances 159

Page 160: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

the staging table, there is a one-to-one relationship to balances in the source system (nosummarization has occurred). The staging table is refreshed with every data load;balances of prior loads are not maintained.

l Data Load—The load process summarizes the balances by profile, balance type, currencybucket, and currency code and loads the balances into ARM. These balances arepermanently stored in ARM but are subject to updating if changed balances are importedin the future.

l Post-Processing—Performs these actions:

m Changes the status of reconciliations “Open with Reviewer” or “Closed” to “Openwith Preparer” if balances changed

m Runs the auto-reconciliation routines

m Flags reconciliations containing normal balance violations (cases where the balanceis expected to be a debit and a credit balance exists, or vice versa)

Statuses of each of the three subprocesses are reported using icons. On Data Load, place yourcursor over an icon in the Staging, Data Load, and Post Process columns to displayinformation:

l Pending ( )

l Running ( )

l Complete ( )

l Error ( )

4 Click New .

5 In New Data Load, enter:

l Name

l Staging Only

If you select staging only, the data load terminates after the first issue of balances notbeing mapped to any profile. Use Staging Only import to validate mapping rules toensure all source balances are mapped to a profile.

l Location

The ERP Integrator location to import

6 Click Close.

Viewing Data Load ResultsThe results column of the Data Load dialog box is blank unless one of these issues exists for theload:

l Unmapped accounts—Occurs if new accounts were activated on the source system and themapping rules do not accommodate them. Clicking the link opens Unmapped Accounts,

160 Managing Reconciliations

Page 161: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

which contains the list of unmapped source system accounts. To resolve the issue, mappingrules must be updated to accommodate the accounts.

l Invalid mappings—Occurs if a profile was deleted in ARM after a mapping rule wasconfigured using the profile. Clicking the link opens a dialog box that identifies the balancesmapped to the missing profiles. Correction of the error requires adjustment of the mappingrules to use a valid profile, or creation of the profiles referenced by the mapping rules.

l Error—Occurs if there is a systemic failure of the data load process. Clicking the link opensa dialog box that displays the error message and provides a link to open the detailed errorlog.

Copying Profiles to PeriodsThe Copy to Period function is limited to administrators.

Note: You can also access Copy to Period in the Profile list, in the Actions panel. See “CopyingProfiles to Period” on page 157.

ä To copy profiles to periods:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select Manage , and then Periods.

2 Select a period and then click Copy to Period .

3 The results page displays the number of profiles found:

l Total number of applicable profiles

l Successfully copied

l Unsuccessfully Copied

l Invalid Profiles

l Already Running/Closed

l In use by other processes

4 Click Close.

Identifying Missing ProfilesThe Identifying Missing Profiles function enables administrators to ensure that reconciliationshave been created for every profile with a frequency that matches a frequency included in theperiod.

ä To identify missing profiles:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select View, then Profile List.

2 Select a profile, then Manage, and then Periods.

Copying Profiles to Periods 161

Page 162: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 Select a period, then click Identify Missing Profiles ( ).

4 To view the missing profiles in Excel, select Actions, and then Export to Excel.

The File Download dialog box opens. Open the file, or if you click Save, the Save As dialogbox is displayed, and the XLS file name is displayed in File name. Select a directory for theXLS file, click Save, and then Close.

Opening PeriodsAll reconciliations in a period are Pending until the period status is changed to Open. When anadministrator changes the status to Open, auto-reconciliations that have met their start date arerun.

l If balances have not been loaded for a reconciliation, or the reconciliation containstransactions, auto-reconciliation is skipped for that reconciliation, the reconciliation statuschanges to Open with Preparer, and a notification is sent to the preparer.

l If auto-reconciliation fails for a reconciliation (for example, the account balance is not zerofor an account authorized for zero balance auto-reconciliation), the reconciliation statuschanges to Open with Preparer, and a notification is sent to the preparer.

For manual reconciliations that have met the start date, status becomes Open with Preparersand notifications are sent to preparers.

Sending NotificationsNotifications are sent to preparers and reviewers as a batch the day after the event that triggersthe notification.

For example, on July 8, five reconciliation for which John is the preparer reach their start date,and their status changes to Open with Preparer. On July 9, John is sent a notification email thatlists the five accounts.

Notifications are sent in these circumstances:

l A notification that the reconciliation is ready to be worked on is sent to the preparer whenreconciliation status changes from Pending to Open with Preparer and to reviewers whenthe status changes to Open with Reviewer.

l A reminder notice is sent to preparers a specified number of days before the due date of thereconciliation, and to reviewers a specified number of days before the due date of the review.The number of days before the due date to send notifications is specified during systemsetup.

l A delinquency notification is sent to preparers the day after the due date of the reconciliation,and to reviewers the day after the due date of the review.

162 Managing Reconciliations

Page 163: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Viewing ReconciliationsYou can open reconciliations from the Reconciliation List view or from the Dashboard. Toperform actions on the reconciliations, the status of the reconciliation must be Open withPreparer or Open with Reviewer, and you must be the Preparer or Reviewer with currentresponsibility. Administrators can reassign the current Preparer or Reviewer, but they cannotperform other actions, such as adding transactions or approving reconciliations.

When a reconciliation is selected from the Reconciliation List for the Preparer or Reviewer withcurrent responsibility, the Actions menu displays an Open option. For all other users, it displaysa View option.

ä To open reconciliations in the Reconciliation List:

1 Select View, and then Reconciliation List.

2 Select Actions, and then Open or View.

The following procedure is limited to Preparers. It is included in this guide for informationpurposes.

ä To open reconciliations in the Dashboard:

1 Select View. and then Dashboard. Open the Reconciliation List portlet.

2 In a Reconciliation List portlet, click an account ID for a reconciliation.

Performing Reconciliations

ä To perform a reconciliation:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, from the Dashboard, or click View, and then Reconciliation ListView.

2 Click on an account to open the Reconciliation Actions dialog box.

3 The Summary Tab is displayed by default.

a. The account information:

l Account—The account ID per the profile definition

l Name

The account name per the profile definition

l Status

Identifies the status of the reconciliation. Values include: Pending, Open (withPreparer, Reviewer 1, Reviewer 2, ...), or Closed

l Period

The period to which the reconciliation pertains

Viewing Reconciliations 163

Page 164: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Start Date

The start date of the reconciliation (the first date the preparer can begin workingon the reconciliation)

l End Date

The final end date of the reconciliation (the due date of the final role assigned tothe reconciliation)

l Description

The account description from the profile definition

b. Warnings

Identifies the number of warnings contained within the reconciliation. If no warningsexist, this section is not visible.

Warnings fall into these classifications:

l Aging Violation less the Balance Explanations

Only applies to reconciliations assigned an account analysis format; identifies thenumber of balance explanation transactions in the reconciliation that containaging violations

l Aging Violation less the Adjustments to the Source System

Applies to all reconciliations; identifies the number of adjustment to the sourcesystem transactions in the reconciliation that contain aging violations

l Aging Violation less the Adjustments to the Subsystem

Only applies to reconciliations assigned a balance comparison format; identifiesthe number of adjustment to the subsystem transactions in the reconciliation thatcontain aging violations

l Normal Balance Violation

Occurs if the reconciliation is expected to have a debit balance and the balance inthe currencies is negative, or if the reconciliation is expected to have a credit balanceand the balance in the currencies is positive

c. Balance Summary contains the balance justification, the format of which is dependenton the format assigned the reconciliation.

l Account Analysis Format

The Balance Summary section for account analysis reconciliations include:

m Source System Balance

The balance imported from the source system or manually entered by thepreparer

m Explained Balance

The sum of balance explanation transactions entered into the reconciliation

m Difference

164 Managing Reconciliations

Page 165: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Source System Balance, less the Explained Balance

m Adjustments

The sum of adjustment to the source system transactions entered into thereconciliation

m Unexplained Difference

Source System Balance, less the Explained Balance, less Adjustments

l Balance Comparison Format

The Balance Summary for balance comparison reconciliations include:

m Source System Balance

The balance imported from the source system or manually entered by thepreparer

m Subsystem Balance

The balance imported from the subsystem or manually entered by thepreparer

m Difference

Source System Balance less the Subsystem Balance

m Adjustments to the Source System

The sum of adjustment to the source system transactions entered into thereconciliation

m Adjusted Source System Balance

Source System Balance less the Adjustments to the Source System

m Adjustments to the Subsystem

The sum of adjustment to the subsystem transactions entered into thereconciliation

m Adjusted Source System Balance

Subsystem Balance less the Adjustments to the Subsystem

m Unexplained Difference

Source System Balance less the Subsystem Balance, less the Adjustments to theSource System, less the Adjustments to the Subsystem

Balance Summary labels can be customized on the format definition, so the row labelsmay not match the previous definitions. In addition, some of the balance rows may behidden for balance comparison reconciliations, so some rows may be missing from thereconciliation.

Depending on the reconciliation configuration, balances may be displayed in up to threecurrency buckets: entered, functional, and reporting. Multiple currencies may existwithin one bucket.

Performing Reconciliations 165

Page 166: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Balance Summary also contains custom attributes defined on the format and pertainingto the overall reconciliation. These attributes may be configured as optional ormandatory, and editable by the preparer, the reviewer, or the preparer or reviewer.

Note: Preparers can edit balances in the Summary Balances table for Reconciliationsconfigured for manual entry of balances. Reconciliations can include customattributes that require input by preparers or reviewers. Custom attributes displaybelow the Balance Summary table on the Balance Summary section.

For example, administrators might require preparers to enter a value in the “Timeto Prepare” custom attribute and reviewers in the “Time to Review” customattribute.

To edit balances:

i. In the reconciliation list, select a reconciliation with the status Open with Preparerfor which you are the preparer.

ii. Select Actions, and then Open.

iii. In the Balance Summary table, click the Edit icon.

iv. Enter the balance information.

v. Click OK.

To edit custom attributes, in the area below the Balance Summary table, enter valuesfor custom attributes.

d. Attachments contain files attached to the overall reconciliation, but not to comments ortransactions on the reconciliation.

Note: Preparers can add attachments to the Attachments section of the Summary tab,to reconciliation transactions, and to their comments. Reviewers andCommenters can add attachments to their comments, but not in the Attachmentssection of the Summary tab or to transactions.

Preparers only: To add an external document or web page link to the Attachmentsections , perform these steps:

i. On the Summary tab, expand Attachments.

ii. Click New .

iii. From the Type list, select one of these types:

l Local File

Enter a name, click Browse to select and attach the file, and click OK.

l URL

166 Managing Reconciliations

Page 167: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Enter a URL name, then enter the URL, for example: Oracle, http://www.oracle.com, and click OK.

l Optional: Repository File

From the file list, select the file, and click OK.

Note: The Repository File option is only displayed if Financial CloseManagement is configured with Oracle Enterprise ContentManagement.

iv. In Name, enter a name to describe the attachment.

v. Enter a URL or browse to select a document.

vi. Click OK.

e. Comments—Contains comments added to the overall reconciliation.

i. Expand Comments.

ii. Select Actions, and then New.

iii. In the text box, enter a comment.

iv. Optional: To add an attachment to an external document or a web page to thecomment, in Reference, select Actions, and then Add, select a document or enter aURL, and then click OK.

v. Enter a URL or browse to select a file.

vi. Click OK.

f. Additional Properties—Contains these attributes:

l Process—The process per the profile definition.

l Format—The format per the profile definition.

l Method—The reconciliation method associated with the format assignment.

l Risk Rating—The risk rating per the profile definition.

l Account Type—The account type per the profile definition.

l Normal Balance—The normal balance per the profile definition; identifies whetherthe reconciliation is expected to contain a debit balance, a credit balance, or a debitor a credit balance. If the balance violates the normal balance, then a warning isset on the reconciliation.

l Auto-Reconciliation Methods—Identifies which of the auto-reconciliation methodsare enabled for the reconciliation.

l Maximum Age Limits—Identifies the maximum age expected for balanceexplanation or adjustment transactions; if the age of the transactions on thereconciliation exceed the expected age, then the reconciliation is flagged with theaging violation warning.

l Manually Enter Balances—Identifies whether balances can be manually enteredinto the reconciliation.

Performing Reconciliations 167

Page 168: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

g. Instructions—Displays instructions per the profile definition.

h. Workflow—Identifies the users assigned each role on the reconciliation and the due datesassociated with each role.

i. Questions—Includes the questions that must be answered by the preparer. Questionscan be configured as optional or mandatory. Mandatory questions must be answeredbefore the reconciliation can be submitted for review. If Questions were not configuredfor the format, then this section is not be visible.

4 The Transaction tabs, depending on the format configuration, contain up to two transaction tabs:

l Account analysis formats have two tabs: one for balance explanation transactions, andone for adjustments to the source system.

l Balance comparison formats can have up to two tabs: one for adjustments to the sourcesystem, and one for adjustments to the subsystem; either or both of these tabs may havebeen hidden on the format definition.

The text on the tabs is also based on format configuration. However, text matches the textdisplayed in the corresponding Balance Summary row.

Each Transaction tab contains a transaction list and a transaction detail section:

l Transaction List—Contains the list of transactions associated with the active transactiontab. From the list, preparers can add, edit, and remove transactions. They can also importtransactions, and copy some or all transactions from a prior reconciliation. Thetransaction list also includes an export feature available to all users to support customreporting and analysis.

l Transaction Detail—The transaction detail section displays the details of the recordselected in the transaction list. When entering new transactions, amounts are enteredinto the lowest enabled currency bucket (typically the entered currency bucket). If theaccount is not configured as an historical rate account, then Account ReconciliationManager calculates the expected functional and reporting currency balances usingexchange rates stored within the system.

5 The Prior Reconciliations tab contains a list of prior period reconciliations for the same account. Thesereconciliations may be opened for viewing, but no changes can be made.

6 The History tab shows the history of key changes to the reconciliation, including a record of when it wassubmitted for review and whether it was approved or rejected.

Adding TransactionsTransactions are line-items preparers add to reconciliations to reconcile differences betweensource system and subsystem balances, or to provide explanations for an account balance.Preparers can add transactions to reconciliations with the status Open with Preparer. Preparerscannot add transactions to reconciliations with the statuses Pending, Open with Reviewer, orClosed.

Preparers can manually enter transactions, import them from flat files, or copy them from priorperiods.

168 Managing Reconciliations

Page 169: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Adding Transactions ManuallyReconciliations have tabs to allow Preparers to enter transactions.

For example, Preparers might enter adjustments to the source system to bring it into agreementwith the subsystem.

All transactions have Transaction Code and Open Date as required fields. The Open Date fieldspecifies the date the transaction was, or should have been, opened in the source system.Depending on the reconciliation format, other fields may be required also.

ä To add transactions manually:

1 In the Reconciliation list, select a reconciliation with the status Open with Preparer for which you arethe preparer.

2 Select Actions, and then Open.

3 Select a transactions tab.

4 Click New.

5 In Transaction Code, you must enter a code for the transaction.

6 In Open Date, you must select the open date for the transaction.

7 Optional: Enter a close date and description. This information is needed for custom attributes.

8 Optional: To change the currency for the transaction, in the currency bucket enabled for data entry,select a currency from the currency list.

9 Enter a value in the currency bucket enabled for data entry. If currency translation is enabled, theremaining currency buckets display translated values. If currency translation is not enabled, enter avalue in all remaining enabled currency buckets.

10 Optional: To change the currency for a translated currency bucket, select a currency from the currencylist.

11 Optional: To override a translated currency value, click Override for the currency bucket and enter thenew value.

Note: To remove the override, click Reset Value.

12 To add a comment to the transaction:

a. In Transaction Detail, expand Comments.

b. Select Actions, and then New.

c. In the New Comment, enter a comment.

d. Optional: To add a reference to an external document, in the Reference section selectActions, and then Add. select a document or enter a URL, and then click OK.

e. To close the Create Comment dialog box, click OK.

13 To add a document attachments to the transaction:

a. In Transaction Detail, expand Attachments.

Performing Reconciliations 169

Page 170: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

b. Select Actions, and then New. The Add Attachment dialog box is displayed.

c. In Add Attachment, in Type, select Local File to attach a file located on your computer orURL to link to a Web link.

d. In the Name field, enter a name to describe the attachment.

e. Enter a URL or browse to select a file.

f. Click OK.

14 Perform an action:

l Click Save to save the transaction.

l Save and Create Another to save the transaction and create a new transaction.

15 Click Close.

Importing Transactions From FilesYou can import transaction into a reconciliation from a file. For example, you exported 10invoices for Prepaid Expenses for July 2012 to a flat file from your source system. You importthe transactions into the reconciliation for Prepaid expenses for July 2012 in AccountReconciliation Manager.

Transaction import files are comma-separated text files. The first row contains only the columnheadings that identify the data in the columns; for example, Transaction code. Separate rowsare used to define each transaction. Required columns are Transaction Code and Open Date.

You must also specify the amount and currency for any enabled currency buckets that are notsubject to currency translation. The fields must be labeled Amount and Amount Currency, witha number to indicate the currency bucket; for example, Amount1 and Amount Currency1 specifythe amount and currency for the first currency bucket.

You do not need to include amount or currency for translated buckets:

l If you do not import these values, the amounts will be calculated using the default currencycodes.

l If you specify a currency but not an amount, the amount will be calculated using the currencycode provided.

l If you specify an amount and a currency code, the amount will be compared to the calculatedtranslated amount, and if it differs, the amount will be marked as overridden.

When you import transactions, you can choose to add the transactions in the file to thetransactions for the reconciliation, or to replace the reconciliations with the transactions in thefile.

ä To import transactions from a file:

1 In the Reconciliation list, select a reconciliation with the status Open with Preparer for which you arethe preparer.

2 Select Actions, and then Open.

170 Managing Reconciliations

Page 171: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 Select a transactions tab.

4 Select Actions, and then Import.

5 Select an import option:

l Select Add to add the transactions in the file to the transactions.

l Select Add All to replace the transactions with the transactions in the file,

6 Click Import.

7 At the Results prompt, click OK.

Editing, Copying, and Deleting TransactionsThe preparer can copy, edit, or delete transactions for reconciliations with the status Open withPreparer. You cannot edit or delete transactions for reconciliations with the status Pending,Open with Reviewer, or Closed.

ä To copy, edit, and delete transactions:

1 In the Reconciliation list, select a reconciliation with the status Open with Preparer for which you arethe preparer.

2 Select Actions, and then Open.

3 Select a transactions tab.

4 Select a transaction.

5 In Transaction Detail, edit, copy, or delete the transaction.

Copying Transactions from Prior ReconciliationA transaction is often valid for multiple periods. For example, you pay rent biannually on abuilding. The invoice for the rent expense paid in January can be carried over to subsequentmonths to explain the balance. You use the Copy Transactions function to copy transactionsfrom prior month.

ä To copy transactions from a prior reconciliation:

1 In the Reconciliation list, open a reconciliation with the status Open with Preparer for which you are thepreparer.

2 Select the Explained Balance tab, and then click Copy Transactions from Prior Reconciliation

3 Select the transactions and then click Copy.

Viewing Prior ReconciliationsInformation contained in account reconciliations for prior months can be useful for preparingthe current month reconciliation. For example, an invoice for rent expense in the Prepaid

Performing Reconciliations 171

Page 172: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Expense account reconciliation for January might help explain the balance in Prepaid Expensefor the current month, February. The Prior Reconciliations tab displays a list of reconciliationsfrom prior periods.

ä To view prior reconciliations:

1 Open a reconciliation.

2 Select the Prior Reconciliations tab.

3 Select a reconciliation.

4 Select Actions, and then Open.

Managing Reconciliation WorkflowPreparers submit reconciliations for review when they are finished working on them. Onlypreparers can submit reconciliations for review. Before a preparer can submit a reconciliation,all required questions must be answered, and values must be supplied for all custom attributeconfigured as required. If the Unexplained Difference Must Be Zero option is enabled, theUnexplained Difference field on the Balance Summary tab must be zero before the preparer cansubmit the reconciliation.

l When a preparer submits a reconciliation, responsibility passes to the first reviewer in theworkflow, and the status changes to Open with Reviewer. An email notification is sent tothe reviewer. If the reconciliation has no reviewers, the status changes to Closed.

l When a reviewer approves a reconciliation, responsibility passes to the next reviewer in theworkflow, if there is one, and status remains Open with Reviewer. An email notification issent to the reviewer. If the reconciliation has no other reviewers, the status changes to Closed.

l When a reviewer rejects a reconciliation, responsibility returns to the preparer, and the statuschanges to Open with Preparer. Reviewers should add a comment to a rejectedreconciliation.

Reviewers can “flag” transactions that need attention. Flagged transactions display a flag icon toenable preparers to find them easily. Reviewer can delete only their own comments. After thereconciliation status changes to Closed, however, comments cannot be deleted.

ä To submit, approve, or reject reconciliations:

1 Select a reconciliation.

2 Select Actions, and then Open.

3 Submit, Approve, or Reject the reconciliation.

172 Managing Reconciliations

Page 173: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Reassigning Preparers and ReviewersAdministrator and power uses can reassign the current preparer for reconciliations with thestatus Open with Preparer and the current reviewer for reconciliations with the status Open withReviewer.

ä To reassign preparers and reviewers:

1 Select a reconciliation with the status Open with Preparer or Open with Reviewer.

2 Select Actions, and then View.

3 Select Actions, and then Reassign User.

4 Select a user.

5 Click OK, and then click Close.

Reopening ReconciliationsAdministrators and power users can reopen closed reconciliations. Reopening a reconciliation:

l Reverts the status to Open with Preparer

l Sends an email notification to the preparer the next morning

ä To reopen reconciliations:

1 On the Reconciliation list, double click reconciliation with a Closed status.

2 On the Summary tab, select Actions, and then Reopen. The new status changes to Open with Preparer.

Closing and Locking PeriodsClosing a period prevents new reconciliations from being started but allows reconciliations thatare in progress to be completed. Locking a period prevents changes to reconciliations for theperiod.

ä To close periods:

1 Select Manage, and then Periods.

2 Select a period.

3 Click Actions, then Set Status, and then Close.

ä To lock periods:

1 Select Manage, and then Periods.

2 Select a period.

3 Select Actions, then Set Status, and then Lock.

Managing Reconciliation Workflow 173

Page 174: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

174 Managing Reconciliations

Page 175: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

15Using Report Binders

In This Chapter

Generating Report Binders .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Viewing Report Binders .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Report binders are used to create versions of reconciliations that may be printed or used foroffline viewing. Report binders can fulfill audit requests. Binders can be created containing thesubset of reconciliations being audited, without having to train auditors on using the AccountReconciliation Manager system.

Report binders can be generated from:

l Manage Periods dialog box

l Reconciliation Lists View

In the first case, the binder contains all reconciliations for the selected period. In the second case,the user can choose to create the binder with all reconciliations visible in the Reconciliation ListView, or just a selected set of records. When generated from the Reconciliation List View, thebinder can include reconciliations from multiple periods.

Report binders are generated as ZIP files containing these formats:

l Report Summary: Contains a hyperlinked list of reconciliations included in the binder.

l Reconciliation Details: One file is created for each reconciliation. The structure is very similarto the structure of the Reconciliation Actions dialog box. At a minimum, the file includeslists of transactions of each type included in the reconciliation. If the user chooses to includetransaction details, full record details are provided for each transaction.

l Attachments: One folder is included for each reconciliation containing attachments to thereconciliation, but only if the user chooses to include attachments when creating the binder.

Generating Report BindersGenerating Report Binders is enabled in the Reconciliation List View.

ä To generate report binders:

1 In Account Reconciliation Manager, select a path:

Generating Report Binders 175

Page 176: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Select Tools, and then Generate Report Binder.

l Select Manage, and then Periods. Select Actions, and then Generate Report Binder.

2 Enter this information:

a. In Report Binder Name, enter a name.

b. In Description, enter a binder description.

c. Optional: Select Include Attachments.

l Attachments

Note: Including attachments in the report greatly increases the size of the reportand may affect performance.

l Include Transaction Detail

d. Optional: Select Include Transaction Detail.

3 If the report binder is generated from the Tools menu, then select which reconciliations to export:

l Selected Reconciliations

l All Reconciliations

4 Click Generate.

5 From File Download, select Open or Save.

If you clicked Save, the Save As dialog box is displayed, and the ZIP file name is displayedin File name at the bottom. Select a directory for the ZIP file, click Save, and then Close.

6 Click Close.

Viewing Report BindersWhen you generate a report binder, it is output in one zipped file. The ZIP file name is the namethat you specified for the Report Binder. The report pages are merged into an HTML report,with page breaks for sections as required, so the report can be printed with a print command.If you choose to include transaction detail, then full transaction records are included followingeach reconciliation summary. If you choose to include attachments, a separate attachmentappendix, containing links to attachments, is created, which you can print separately.Attachments are downloaded to separate folders.

If you saved the report binder as a ZIP file, you can extract everything from the ZIP, which createsa directory structure with the same name as the report binder. You can see the report binder byopening the HTML page in the directory.

The report page contains this information:

l Account Name

l Warnings

l Balance Summary

l Additional Properties

176 Using Report Binders

Page 177: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Workflow

l History

l Questions

l Attachments

l Comments

ä To view report binders:

1 Navigate to the directory in which you downloaded the ZIP file, and double-click the file.

2 Extract the ZIP files to the desired directory.

3 Navigate to that directory and locate the subdirectory that matches the ZIP file name.

4 From the subdirectory, double-click Index.html to view the report binder.

Viewing Report Binders 177

Page 178: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

178 Using Report Binders

Page 179: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

AConfiguring ERP Integrator for

Account Reconciliation Manager

In This Appendix

Overview ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Data Integration Options for Importing Balances into ARM .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Data Load Process... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Planning the ERP Integrator Configuration... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Supported Currency Codes in ARM.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

ERP Integrator for ARM Troubleshooting ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

OverviewIntegration of account balances is core to the effective functioning of an account reconciliationsolution. Oracle Hyperion Financial Close Management module Account ReconciliationManager (ARM) uses ERP Integrator to load balances from source systems and map the balancesto reconciliations.

ERP Integrator is used by many Oracle applications. This section describes how to plan for anARM implementation and to explain how a typical ARM customer configures ERP Integratorfor ARM. This document is intended to supplement the instructions in the Oracle HyperionFinancial Data Quality Management ERP Integration Adapter for Oracle ApplicationsAdministrator's Guide.

Overview 179

Page 180: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Data Integration Options for Importing Balances intoARM

Subtopics

l ERP Integrator Sources

l Open Interface Method

l File-Based Data Loads

ERP Integrator SourcesERP Integrator has native support for importing general ledger balances from the following ERPIntegrator source systems:

l Oracle E-Business Suite 11i, 12

l Oracle Fusion Financials

l PeopleSoft Enterprise Financial Management 9.0, 9.1

l SAP ERP Financial 4.7c, ECC 6.0 Enhancement Pack 4.0+

l JD Edwards Enterprise version 9.0

After connections to these source systems are configured in ERP Integrator, balances areretrieved from the source system directly upon initiation of a data load (no manual extract fromthe source system is required).

Open Interface MethodERP Integrator provides an Open Interface Adapter, which enables customers to populate datafrom any source system into an open interface table in ERP Integrator, where the data is thenaccessible for import into ARM. This option is useful for importing general ledger balances fromERP Integrator for which adapters have not been produced, from subledger systems from anyERP Integrator platform, from Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, or from any othersystem containing balances to be reconciled.

In addition to configuring the Open Interface Adapter in ERP Integrator, customers must alsopopulate the open interface table each month, using a data extraction tool of the customer’schoice. ODI can be used for this purpose, so long as the customer obtains a license to ODI.

180 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 181: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

File-Based Data Loads

Subtopics

l File-Naming Convention

l File Columns

l Importing Balances Associated with Different Currency Buckets

File-based data loads enable customers to import balances from delimited or fixed-width textfiles. In addition to configuring the file import, customers must also publish the files to beimported to the proper location each period. The location is configurable based on the ERPIntegrator application root directory. See the section called “Configuring System Settings”.

File-Naming Convention

Subtopics

l Static File Name

l Static File Name plus a Period Suffix

ERP Integrator supports two naming conventions for data load files: Static File Name, or StaticFile Name plus a Period Suffix. The convention used is based on the Data Load Rule configuredfor the file. See “Configuring Data Load Rules for ERP Integrator Sources” on page 202.

Static File Name

The name of the file remains the same from period to period. This option is only for customerswho plan to load balances for one period at a time because the file name is the same for allperiods, the directory can only store one copy of the file at a time.

For example, if the Static File Name is set to EBS_Balances, when balances are imported for aselected period, ERP Integrator looks for a file titled EBS_Balances and imports those balancesinto the selected period.

Static File Name plus a Period Suffix

The file name consists of a static part that remains the same from period to period, and a suffixthat identifies the period. This option is for customers who may load balances for multipleperiods (for example, importing January and February balances throughout the month ofFebruary).

When choosing the Period Suffix, two options are available: Period Key or Period Name. Bothvalues are configured in the Global Mapping section of the ERP Integrator Period Mappingdialog. The Period Suffix must exactly match the values configured, or the import fails.

For example, if the Static File Name is set to EBS_Balances_.txt, Period Name is used as the suffix,and the Period Name is “January 2012”, then when balances are imported for January, ERPIntegrator looks for a file titled EBS_Balances_January 2012.txt and import those balances

Data Integration Options for Importing Balances into ARM 181

Page 182: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

into the selected period. If the file matching the expected name does not exist, then no balancesare imported.

File ColumnsFiles must include the following columns:

l Account Segments: The source system account segments associated with the balance (onesegment per column)

l Balance: The period-end balance

In addition, if the file contains balances in multiple currencies, then an additional column mustexist in the file containing the three-digit ISO currency code associated with each balance. If thebalances pertain to one currency, then currency code may be omitted from the file andconfigured at the Location level. See “Supported Currency Codes in ARM” on page 213.

Files do not require a header row. If a header row is included, it must be configured to be ignoredin the Import Format definition.

Determining which Source System Segments to Include in the File

Consider these factors when determining which source system segments to include in the file:

1. Segments used in balance mappings—Any source system segments that are used to mapbalances from the source system to Profiles in ARM must exist within the file.

a. For example, if your source system contains segments for Company, Account, ProfitCenter, Plant, and Intercompany code, yet reconciliations are only performed at theCompany-Account level, the file must contain only values for the Company andAccount segments. The values in these two segments are used to map balances to theProfile in ARM.

b. If, however, some reconciliations are performed at the Company-Account level, andothers are performed at the Company-Account-Plant level, then the file must storevalues from all three segments, so that the mapping rules can be configured properly.Mapping rules for accounts reconciled the Company-Account level ignore the Plantsegment values, while rules for accounts reconciled at the Company-Account-Plant leveluse all three.

2. Segments that need to be visible during drill-back to aid in discovery—When viewers ofreconciliations view balances in ARM, they are presented in summary, at the level at whichreconciliation is performed. ARM supports drill-back to ERP Integrator for the balancedetail. The information displayed on the drill-back landing page is obtained from the valuesin the file. Therefore, all information that should be visible during drill-back must exist inthe file, so that the information is present during drill-back.

Importing Balances Associated with Different Currency BucketsARM supports reconciliation of balances in up to three currency buckets. The names of bucketsare configurable within ARM but are generally classified as the following:

182 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 183: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Entered: The currency in which the transaction occurred

l Functional: The currency of the entity that owns the ledger

l Reporting: An enterprise-wide reporting currency (typically the consolidation currency)

If the reconciliation process requires reconciliation of balances in more than one currencybucket, then balances must be imported for each bucket and a separate file is required for eachset of balances. In this case, the static file name should include the currency bucket name toenable proper configuration of the import files.

Data Load ProcessThe ARM data load process encompasses three phases:

l Staging (managed by ERP Integrator)—The staging phase extracts balances from the sourcesystem, assigns an ARM Profile ID and balance Source Type (source system or subsystem),and stores the balances in the ERP Integrator staging table (TDataseg) by Location andPeriod. A one-to-one relationship exists between balances in the staging table and balancesin the source system (no summarization has occurred). The staging table maintains onlythe latest data load for each Location/Period combination. When balances are importedmultiple times for the same Location/Period (for example, when importing multiple sets ofpreliminary balances for a period), only the latest data load is maintained, ensuring that datavolumes are managed appropriately.

l Load (managed by ARM)—The load phase summarizes the balances by Period, Location,Profile ID, balance Source Type, currency bucket, and currency code, and loads the balancesinto ARM. These balances are permanently stored in ARM but are subject to updating ifchanged balances are imported in the future.

l Post-Processing (managed by ARM)—the postprocessing phase performs the followingactions:

m Changes the status of reconciliations “Open with Reviewer” or “Closed” to “Open withPreparer” if the reconciliation balances changed

m Runs the auto-reconciliation routines

m Flags reconciliations containing normal balance violations (cases in which the balanceis expected to be a debit and a credit balance exists, or the converse.)

The configuration of data loads must occur within ERP Integrator; however, data loads must beinitiated from within ARM. Although ERP Integrator enables data loads to be initiated from

Data Load Process 183

Page 184: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

within ERP Integrator, doing so limits execution to the first phase (Staging). The Load and Post-Processing phases will not occur. To execute a complete data load (encompassing all threephases), an Administrator must initiate data loads within ARM from the Manage Periods dialog.

Planning the ERP Integrator ConfigurationThe main components of an ERPI data load are Location, Import Format, Data Load Rules, andData Load Mapping.

Location—The level at which a data load is executed in ARM. A Location is associated with onesource system, but can import data from multiple ledgers from that system. Each Location isassigned an Import Format, Data Load Rules, and a Data Load Mapping.

Import Format—Determines which fields (columns) are extracted from the source system andhow the data is stored in the ERP Integrator staging table.

Data Load Rules—Determine which records (rows) are extracted from the source system,including which balance types are selected (Entered/Functional), whether zero balances areincluded, and whether currency rates are imported along with the balances (for ERP Integratorsources only).

Data Load Mapping—Determines which ARM Profile ID and balance Source Type is assigned toeach balance imported. Source Type refers to the classification of a balance as either a sourcesystem balance or a subsystem balance.

Location is a key component and requires consideration and planning.

One Location is needed for each general ledger and subledger from which balances are imported.For example, if general ledger balances must be imported from E-Business Suite, PeopleSoft,and SAP, and subledger balances are imported from the Accounts Payable and AccountsReceivable subledger from each of the three source systems, then nine Locations are required:

184 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 185: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Source System Repository Interface Method

E-Business Suite General Ledger E-Business Suite Adapter

E-Business Suite Accounts Payable Subledger Open Interface or File-Based Data Load

E-Business Suite Accounts Receivable Subledger Open Interface or File-Based Data Load

PeopleSoft General Ledger PeopleSoft Adapter

PeopleSoft Accounts Payable Subledger Open Interface or File-Based Data Load

PeopleSoft Accounts Receivable Subledger Open Interface or File-Based Data Load

SAP General Ledger SAP Adapter

SAP Accounts Payable Subledger Open Interface or File-Based Data Load

SAP Accounts Receivable Subledger Open Interface or File-Based Data Load

If balances are imported from multiple ledgers within one source system and the ledgers containdifferent charts of accounts or period configurations, then a separate Location is required foreach configuration.

Multiple Reconciliation ProcessesBalances within one Location can be assigned only to one Profile ID in ARM. Therefore, if thesame source system accounts need to be reconciled as part of two different reconciliationprocesses (for example, as part of the Balance Sheet Reconciliation Process and the ConsolidationSystem Reconciliation Process), then a separate Location must exist for each Process (becausein this case, two Profile IDs exist in ARM: one for each process).

When performing multiple reconciliation processes for the same source system balances, Oraclerecommends naming the Locations with a combination of the source system name and theprocess name. For example:

l BSProcess_EBS_GL (E-Business Suite general ledger balances for the Balance SheetReconciliation Process)

l BSProcess_EBS_AP (E-Business Suite Accounts Payable subledger balances for the BalanceSheet Reconciliation Process)

l ConsolProcess_ EBS_GL (E-Business Suite general ledger balances for the ConsolidationSystem Reconciliation Process)

Same Source System Account Reconciled in Two Profiles inOne ProcessOn rare occasions, the same source system account may be included in two reconciliations aspart of the same reconciliation process in ARM. Within one Location in ERP Integrator, a sourcesystem balance can only be assigned to one Profile ID in ARM. Therefore, to accommodate a

Planning the ERP Integrator Configuration 185

Page 186: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

second assignment, create a second Location for the same source system. Only those accountssubject to a second Profile ID assignment are mapped in this Location. The rest of the accountsare ignored.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM

Subtopics

l Configuring System Settings

l Registering Target Applications

l Configuring Period Mapping

l Configuring Category Mappings

l Registering Source Systems

l Registering Source Adapter

l Selecting Source Accounting Entities

l Configuring Import Formats

l Configuring Locations

l Configuring Data Load Rules

l Configuring Data Load Mapping

ä To configure ERP Integrator for ARM:

1 Log on to Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Workspace.

2 Launch ERP Integrator: In Workspace, click File, then Administer, and then ERP Integrator.

Configuring System Settings

ä To configure system settings:

1 On the Tasks navigator, in Preferences, click System Settings.

2 Provide the following values for the system settings options, and then click Save:

Option Value

ODI Agent URL The host and port should be the same as was configured during ODI installation. For example: http://10.149.101.173:20910/oracleodiagent

ODI User Name SUPERVISOR

ODI Password SUNOPSIS

ODI Execution Repository WORKREP

ODI Master RepositoryDriver

WORKREP

ODI Master Repository URL Must match the Master Repository schema created during ODI installation

186 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 187: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Option Value

ODI Master Repository User Must match the Master Repository schema created during ODI installation

ODI Master RepositoryPassword

Must match the Master Repository schema created during ODI installation

Application Root Directory This folder holds import files when data is imported from file-based sources. This folder must be locatedon the ODI server, and sharing should be configured so that it is accessible by the server upon whichERP Integrator is installed and from computers responsible for placing files into the folder. Also placeOpen_Interface_Adapter.xml in this folder. Get this file at:<EPM_ORACLE_HOME>\products\FinancialDataQuality\odi\11.1.2.2.00\adapters.

File Archive Directory Import files are archived in this folder. Create this folder under the Application Root directory.

Registering Target Applications

Subtopics

l Configuring the Target Application Summary

l Configuring the Dimension Details

l Predefined Dimensions

l Configuring LOOKUP Dimensions

In order for ERP Integrator to retrieve data for ARM, ARM must be registered as a TargetApplication in ERP Integrator.

Configuring the Target Application Summary

ä To register the target application:

1 In Setup, click the Target Application link.

2 Click Add .

3 Select Account Reconciliation Manager, and then click OK.

Configuring the Dimension DetailsConfiguration of the Target Application Dimension Details enables users to specify how columnsin the staging table are used for storing values from source systems. Only source system valuesconfigured as Dimensions exist in the staging table.

The staging table contains a fixed definition, including a series of standard fields of pre-determined use by ERP Integrator, and a series of 20 user defined fields (UD1-UD20) that canbe used by Target Applications for application-specific purposes. In ARM’s case, UD1 is reservedfor storing the balance Source Type (the setting that classifies balances in ARM as either sourcesystem or subsystem balances). You can use UD2-UD20 to store other information required tobe imported from the source systems.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 187

Page 188: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Predefined DimensionsAfter registering the Target Application, the Dimension Details section contain the followingfour uneditable rows:

l Period: Maps the source system period to the Period column in the staging table

l Profile: Maps the ARM Profile ID to the Account column in the staging table

l Currency Bucket: Maps the ARM currency bucket to the Scenario column in the staging table

l Source Type: Maps the ARM balance type (source system or subsystem) to the UD1 columnin the staging table

Configuring LOOKUP DimensionsIn addition to the four predefined dimensions, additional dimensions (LOOKUP Dimensions)need to be added for additional data required to be imported from the source systems and storedin the staging table. Additional values are necessary in the staging table in these cases:

1. Segments used in balance mappings: Any source system segments that are used to mapbalances from the source system to Profiles in ARM must exist within the staging table.

For example, if your source system contains segments for Company, Account, Profit Center,Plant, and Intercompany code, yet reconciliations are only ever performed at the Company-Account level, then the staging table must contain values for the Company and Accountsegments. The values in these two segments are used to map balances to the Profile in ARM.

If, however, some reconciliations are performed at the Company-Account level, while othersare performed at the Company-Account-Plant level, then the staging table must store valuesfrom all three segments; now you can configure the mapping rules properly. Mapping rulesfor accounts reconciled the Company-Account level ignores the Plant segment values, whilerules for accounts reconciled at the Company-Account-Plant level uses all three.

2. Segments must be visible during drill-back to help discovery: When viewers of reconciliationsview balances in ARM, they are presented in summary, at the level at which reconciliationis performed. ARM supports drill-back to ERP Integrator for the balance detail. Theinformation displayed on the drill-back landing page is obtained from the values in the file.Therefore, all information that should be visible during drill-back must exist in the file, sothat the information will be present during drill-back.

ä To configure LOOKUP dimensions:

1 On the Dimension Details tab, click Add/Edit Lookup Dimension.

2 Click Add .

3 Assign a Dimension Name and select from the list of User Defined columns in the staging table to storethe value in.

Assigning a name to the column makes it easier to remember what data is stored in thecolumn when the Dimension is used in subsequent configuration steps.

188 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 189: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

For example, when configuring balance mapping rules, refer to columns “Company” and“Account” instead of “UD2” and “UD3”.

Because the same staging table is used to store balances from all source systems, names mayneed to be assigned more generically if the source systems have very unique charts ofaccounts. For example, if the staging table is configured to store three segment values, andsegment three is called “Profit Center” in one source system and “Department” in another,then the name assigned to the Dimension may need to be generic in order to accommodateboth. In cases like this, “Segment 3” may be a Dimension name. In addition, best practiceswould dictate using the same segment names in ARM.

LOOKUP Dimension names are used only in ERP Integrator during configuration. Theyare not visible to users of ARM viewing imported data through drill-back to ERP Integrator.Rather, when drilling back from ARM to ERP Integrator, these users see labels that arespecific to each data source imported.

Configuring Period MappingPeriods exist in ARM, source systems, and ERP Integrator. For ERP Integrator to successfullyretrieve source system balances and export those balances to the proper period in ARM, rulesmust be defined that document the relationship between these three sets of periods. This isaccomplished using the Period Mapping feature in ERP Integrator.

ä To configure period mapping:

1 From Tasks, in Setup, select, click the Period Mapping link.

2 Configure global mapping and application mapping according to the instructions below.

Configuring Global Mapping:Global mapping is where ERP Integrator periods are created and where default mappings areestablished between:

l ERP Integrator and target applications like ARM

l ERP Integrator and source systems

If you use ERP Integrator to import balances to other Oracle Enterprise PerformanceManagement System applications, then values may be present on the Global Mapping tab thatare tailored to a different application. ARM uses the values on the Application Mapping tab (notthe Global Mapping tab). However, you can only create Application Mappings for periodsexisting on the Global Mappings tab. Hence, both are required.

Ensure that the list of periods required by ARM exists on the Global Mapping tab.

ä To add periods:

1 Select the Global Mapping tab.

2 Click Add. For each period added, provide the following values:

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 189

Page 190: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Period Key: Unique identifier for the period and must be a date value. Period End Date wouldbe a good value to use as the Period Key.

Prior Period Key: The Period Key associated with the preceding period. The Period Key neednot have to exist in ERP Integrator to be used in the Prior Period Key column.

Period Name: Period Name is a secondary identifier for the period. The value must also beunique, but may include alpha-numeric characters.

Target Period Month: Provide the name of the period exactly as it exists in ARM.

Year Target: Year is a required value, but it does not affect processing for ARM. Provide theyear associated with the corresponding ARM period.

3 To save the mapping, click Save.

Repeat step 1 and step 2 until all periods are added.

Note: Leave Target Period Quarter, Target Period Year, and Target Period Day columnsblank.

A sample Global Mapping:

Configuring Application MappingApplication Mapping is required for ARM.

ä To configure Application Mapping:

1 Select the Application Mapping tab.

2 Select Account Reconciliation Manager from the Target Application selection box.

3 Click Add.

4 For each period, provide the following values:

Period Name: Select the Period Name from the list provided (obtained from the GlobalMapping tab).

Period Key: Defaults based on the Global Mapping configuration.

190 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 191: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Target Period Month: This value must match exactly match ARM’s associated period name.This is how we associate the ERP Integrator period with the ARM period.

Year Target: Year is a required value, but it does not affect processing for ARM. Provide theyear associated with the corresponding ARM period.

Note: Leave the Target Period Quarter, Target Period Year, and Target Period Day columnsblank.

5 Click Save.

6 Repeat steps step 3 and step 4 until you add all periods.

Configuring Source MappingConfigure Source Mappings: Source mappings define the relationship between ERP Integratorperiods and source system periods. Select the “Explicit” option if mappings must be configuredat the GL Calendar level to support ledgers that use different period calendars.

For additional instructions on configuring source mappings, refer to the Oracle HyperionFinancial Data Quality Management ERP Integration Adapter for Oracle ApplicationsAdministrator's Guide; procedures are specific to each source system.

Configuring Category Mappings

Subtopics

l Reviewing ARM Currency Configuration

l Configuring Currency Category Mappings

Category mappings enable users to associate source system balances with ARM currency buckets.

Note: The instructions for configuring Category Mappings in ERP Integrator depend on howARM is configured.

Reviewing ARM Currency Configuration

ä Review the ARM currency configuration before you configure categories:

1 Log on to ARM as an Administrator.

2 Click Manage, and then System Setup.

3 Click Currency to review the currency configuration.

4 On the Currency Buckets tab, determine whether ARM is configured for one currency or multiple currencyenvironment:

l If Balances and Transactions are in one currency is selected, follow the instructions forsingle-currency category mapping.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 191

Page 192: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l If Balances and Transactions are in multiple currencies is selected:

a. Note which currency buckets are enabled in ARM.

b. Note the names of each enabled currency bucket.

c. Follow the instructions for multicurrency category mapping.

Configuring Currency Category Mappings

ä To configure Category Mappings:

1 From Tasks, in Setup, select Category Mapping.

2 Configure Global Mappings and Application Mappings, using either the Single Currency or MulticurrencyCategory Mapping instructions:

Single-Currency Category Mappings

If you configured ARM one currency environment, create one Category on the Global Mappingand Application Mapping tabs with the following values:

Note: When configuring the Application Mapping values, select Account ReconciliationManager as the Target Application.

Multicurrency Category Mappings

If you configured ARM as a multicurrency environment, for each enabled currency bucket inARM, add a corresponding category in ERP Integrator on the Global Mapping and ApplicationMapping tabs. When configuring the application mapping values, select Account ReconciliationManager as the Target Application.

Note: The target category value must match the bucket name in ARM.

192 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 193: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Registering Source SystemsSource systems must be registered for each source system containing balance data to be loadedinto ARM. “Source System” in this case refers to:

l Supported general ledger platforms: Add a source system for each general ledger from whichbalances are imported.

l Files containing balances imported using File-Based Data Loads: If balances are imported fromfiles, then define a source system of type “File”. Only one should be required, even if filesfrom multiple systems are being imported (they can all use the same Source System of type“File”).

l Balances imported using the Open Interface method: Balances imported using the OpenInterface method require a Source System Type of “Other”.

ä To configure source systems:

1 From Tasks, in Setup, select Source System.

2 Refer to the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management Adapter for Hyperion EnterpriseAdministrator's Guide for instructions on configuring each type of source system; instructions are type-specific. If detailed logging is desired, set the Log Level to 5.

Registering Source AdapterThe source adapter must be registered if data will be loaded from file-based sources.

ä To register the source adapter:

1 From Tasks, in Setup, select the source adapter link.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 193

Page 194: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

2 Click Import.

3 Select Open_Interface_Adapter.xml and then click OK.

4 Click Save.

Selecting Source Accounting Entities

Subtopics

l Configuring Accounting Entities

l Configuring Entity Groups

After you define the source systems, you must configure the Accounting Entities by selectingthe ledgers from which balances should be imported from each source.

Note: This step does not apply to source systems of type File or Other.

ä To configure source accounting entities:

1 From Tasks, in Setup, select the Source Accounting Entities link.

2 From the types list, select Source System Type.

3 Select the Associated Source System, which are derived from Source System configuration.

Configuring Accounting Entities

ä To configure accounting entities:

1 On the Entities tab, check the box next to the ledgers (E-Business Suite/Fusion) or Business Units(PeopleSoft) from which balances should be imported.

2 For E-Business Suite/Fusion source systems, if drill-back to the general ledger is desired, select aResponsibility Name that has proper system security required for viewing journal summaries and details.If drill-back is not desired, leave Responsibility Name blank.

3 Click Save.

Configuring Entity GroupsIn a source system, if multiple accounting entities (ledgers/business units) contain the samechart of accounts and have balances that are assigned the same currency bucket, you can createan Entity Group for them. When configuring data load rules, you can create one rule for theEntity Group, rather than having to create separate rules for each entity.

Consider an example of an E-Business Suite general ledger that contains the following individualledgers (all of which use the same chart of accounts):

194 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 195: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

l Ledger A—Contains entered and functional currency balances for all transactions associatedwith Entity A.

l Ledger B—Contains entered and functional currency balances for all transactions associatedwith Entity B.

l Ledger C—Contains entered and functional currency balances for all transactions associatedwith Entity C.

In this case, an entity group could be created for Ledger A, B, and C, because they share the samechart of accounts and currency bucket configuration.

ä To configure entity groups:

1 Select the Entity Groups tab.

2 Click Add.

3 Enter a name, and optional description for the entity group.

4 In the Entity Group Entities table, place a check mark next to each accounting entity that should beincluded in the entity group.

5 Click Save.

Configuring Import Formats

Subtopics

l Configuring Details

l Configuring Mappings

Import formats determine which fields (columns) are extracted from the source system and howthe data is stored in the ERP Integrator staging table. ImportfFormats are created for oneaccounting entity. However, if you import data from multiple accounting entities that have thesame COA, you can define one import format using a representative accounting entity and thenuse it for importing data for all accounting entities with the same COA.

ä To configure import formats:

1 From Tasks, in Setup, click the Import Format link.

2 To add an import format, click Add.

Configuring Details

ä To configure details:

1 Provide a name for the import format. Include the source name and information about the ledgerconfiguration in the name of the import format. Doing so makes it easier to select the proper importformat when configuring the location.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 195

Page 196: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

2 Select the source system.

3 Select a representative accounting entity (a ledger that contains the correct chart of accountsconfiguration). See “Configuring Data Load Rules” on page 201.

Note: You can use the import format to load balances from any accounting entity or entitygroup that shares the same chart of accounts. The selection of the chart of accountsto use occurs within the data load rule configuration.

4 Select the Account Reconciliation Manager as the Target Application.

5 Click Save.

Configuring MappingsThe mappings section determines how data from the source system is stored in the ERPIntegrator staging table. The procedures vary based on the type of source system for which theimport format is being configured.

Mapping ERP Integrator Sources

The values appearing in columns Source Segment 1 through Source Segment 5 are the actualsegment values in the source system being confirmed. When configuring ARM, only SourceSegment 1 column is used, because only one source segment value is stored in one staging tablecolumn. The other Source Segment columns would be used if source values were concatenatedinto one column in the staging table (which is not a use case expected to apply to ARM).

ä To map ERP Integrator sources:

1 For each source segment displayed in the Source Segment 1 column that should be imported from thesource system and stored in the staging table, perform the following procedures:

a. In the Dimensions column, locate the row that contains the corresponding staging tablecolumn name (the staging table columns were configured in the LOOKUP Dimensionssection of Register Target Application). See “Configuring LOOKUP Dimensions” onpage 188.

b. Assign the source segment column in the Source Segment 1 column on the same row.

2 Assign the Account source segment to the Profile dimension. do not map the Source Type dimension.

3 After you configure the mappings, click Save.

196 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 197: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

In the previous example:

l The Account segment from the source system is stored in the Account column of theERP Integrator staging table.

l The Account segment is also mapped to the Profile dimension, which is a requirementfor the data to load properly.

l The Company segment is stored in the Company column of the ERP Integrator stagingtable.

l The Department segment is stored in the Dept column of the ERP Integrator stagingtable.

Note: Dimension is synonymous with ERP Integrator staging table column.

Mapping File-Based Sources

You must map every column that exists in the source file to a target, which refers to a columnin the ERP Integrator staging table.

Configuration of Delimited Files

Consider the following sample comma-delimited file:

Company, Account, Department, Amount, Currency Code100, 1510, 100, 12345.66 USD100, 1510, 200, 4364.89 USD100, 1510, 300, 1838.29 USD

The file contains five columns:

1. Company2. Account3. Department4. Amount5. Currency Code

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 197

Page 198: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To configure delimited files, for each column in the file, perform the following procedures:

1 In the Target column, locate the row that contains the staging table column name associated with thecolumn in the file (the staging table columns were configured in the LOOKUP Dimensions section ofRegister Target Application).

2 Assign the file column in the Source column on the same row. The actual text typed into Source Columnis used for display purposes in ERP Integrator only. The text need not match a column heading in thefile (in fact the file is not required to even include a header row).

l Field Number: Provide the column number of the field in the file. This value is used byERP Integrator to locate the data in the file that should be stored in the staging tablecolumn specified in the Target column. In the previous example, Company would havea value of “1”, because it is the first column in the file. Department would have a valueof “3”.

l Number of Fields: The total number of fields in the file. In the previous example, thevalue would be “5”, since 5 columns exist in the file.

l Expression: If values in the file require manipulation or conversion, Expressions may beused. NZP, which ensures that zero balances are imported, is key for file-based sources.To import zero balances (a typical account reconciliation requirement), enter NZP intothe expression column for the Amount field. If this expression is omitted, zero balancesare not imported. See the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management ERPIntegration Adapter for Oracle Applications Administrator's Guide for details on otherexpressions.

3 Map the Account column to the Profile Target.

If the file contains a Currency Code column, this column must also be mapped to the stagingtable. By default, the Target column does not include the currency staging table column. Toadd the Currency staging table column to the Target column, perform the followingprocedure.

ä To add the Currency staging table column to the Target column:

1 Click Add, and then select Currency Row.

2 Map the column in the file containing the Currency Code to the Currency Target.

The following image demonstrates how the sample file, once configured, is displayed in ERPIntegrator.

198 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 199: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Configuration of Fixed-Width Files

Configuration of fixed width files varies from delimited files in one way: instead of Field Numberand Number of fields, Start and Length are required.

l Start: Identifies the starting position within the row of the value to be imported. For example,if configuring the mapping for Currency Code, and Currency Code begins in position 65 ofeach row, then enter 65 in the Start field.

l Length: Identifies the length of the data field. For example, since Currency Codes are alwaysthree digits in length, enter 3 in the Length field.

Configuration of Skip Rows

Data files may include rows that you need to ignore. ERP Integrator includes a robust featureset for configuring rows that should be skipped, or ignored, during import.

ä To add Skip Rows:

1 Click Add, and then select Skip.

2 Configure the Skip Row, using the following example for guidance.

Skip the first five rows in the file, because they contain heading information. Also skip therows containing the column headers and the heading underlines. These rows repeat on everypage; skip them every time they are displayed. The following image demonstrates how ERPIntegrator was configured to ignore these rows.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 199

Page 200: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

When the value in the Expression column appears in the range identified by the Start Positionand Length, then the row should be skipped. For example, consider the Source Column“Skip 3” in the previous image. When “Account” is displayed in positions 1-7, the row isskipped, causing the row (marked with the arrow in the following screen capture) to beskipped.

Regenerating ODI Scenario

When an Import Format is added or updated for data sources other than E-Business Suite,PeopleSoft, or Fusion, then a Regenerate ODI Scenario message is displayed, requiring you toclick the Regenerate ODI Scenario button. Failure to perform this action causes the import tofail. See“ERP Integrator for ARM Troubleshooting” on page 217 for a typical ODI Studio ErrorMessage, which results from a failure to Regenerate ODI Scenario.

Note: Import Formats names cannot contain spaces.

Configuring LocationsFor assistance with determining the Locations required, see “Planning the ERP IntegratorConfiguration” on page 184.

ä To configure locations:

1 From Tasks, in Setup, click the Location link.

2 Click Add.

3 Provide a name for the location. In the name, include descriptive information about the source systemfrom which balances are obtained and the ARM Process for which Profiles are mapped. The Location

200 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 201: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

name is visible in ARM and you can use it to initiate specific data loads. Therefore, having a descriptivename is helpful. For example:

l EBS_GL_BSProcess (E-Business Suite general ledger balances for the Balance SheetReconciliation Process)

l EBS_GL_ConsolProcess (E-Business Suite general ledger balances for the ConsolidationSystem Reconciliation Process)

l EBS_AP_BSProcess (E-Business Suite Accounts Payable subledger balances for theBalance Sheet Reconciliation Process)

4 Select the Import Format that should be used when importing balances from this Location. Recall thatthe Import Format determines which information is extracted from the source system and how it is storedin the ERP Integrator staging table.

5 Functional Currency: If the Location pertains to a Source System of “Flat File”, and the file does notcontain a currency code column (because all balances in the file pertain to one currency), then thecurrency must be specified in the Functional Currency column. If applicable, enter the three digit ISOcurrency code associated with the balances in the file. See “Supported Currency Codes in ARM” onpage 213.

6 Click Save.

Note: Typically you leave Accounting Entity blank. When configuring the Data Load Rulesassociated with the Location, you can assign an Accounting Entity or Entity Groupto each Data Load Rule, enabling one Location to be used for importing balancesfrom more than one Accounting Entity. If you specify an Accounting Entity at theLocation level, then the Location can only be used for importing balances from thissingle Accounting Entity.

Configuring Data Load Rules

Subtopics

l Configuring Data Load Rules for ERP Integrator Sources

l Configuring Data Load Rules for File-Based Data Loads

Data Load Rules determine which records (rows) are extracted from the source system, includingwhich balance types are selected (Entered/Functional), whether zero balances are included, andwhether currency rates are imported along with the balances (for ERP Integrator sources only).

For each Location, one Data Load rule must be configured for each currency bucket for whichbalances are imported. For example, if Location A contains ledgers from which Entered andFunctional currency balances are required to be imported, then two Data Load Rules will existfor this Location: one for importing Entered currency balances, and one for importingFunctional currency balances. ARM settings determine which bucket is enabled for eachreconciliation.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 201

Page 202: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To configure Data Load Rules:

1 On Tasks, in Data Load, click the link.

2 Select a Location by clicking the Search Location icon. After selecting a Location, the Target shoulddisplay Account Reconciliation Manager. Period and Category may contain values; ignore them. Theseare default values that are ignored by ARM when data loads are run.

3 To add a Data Load Rule, in the Data Rule Summary section, click Add.

Configuring Data Load Rules for ERP Integrator SourcesIf the Location references an ERP Integrator source system, perform the following procedure:

In the Details section:

1. Name: Provide a name for the Data Load Rule. In the name, include descriptive informationabout the source system from which balances are obtained and the currency bucket to beassigned to the balances.

2. Category: Select the currency bucket to be assigned to the balances from the Categoryselection.

3. Include Adjustment Periods: If Adjustment periods should be included, select Yes. Otherwise,select No.

4. Period Mapping Type: Select Default to use the Application Mapping settings in the PeriodMapping configuration. If period Source Mappings were configured for this source system,select Explicit. See “Configuring Source Mapping” on page 191.

E-Business Suite, Fusion, and SAP Source Systems

If the Source system is Oracle E-Business Suite, Fusion, or SAP, in the Source Filters section,make these selections:

1. Amount Type: Select Monetary.

2. Include Zero Balance: Select Yes.

3. Amount for Balance Sheet Accounts: Select YTD.

4. Amount for Income Statement Accounts: Select YTD.

5. Currency Type: Select the value that corresponds with the currency bucket to be assigned inthis Data Load Rule (per the Category value selected in the Details section).

202 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 203: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

a. If Category = Entered (or its equivalent in ARM), select Entered.

b. If Category = Functional (or its equivalent in ARM), select Functional.

c. If Category = Reporting (or its equivalent in ARM), select Translated/Group.

6. If the objective is to import all balances from the Location, leave Currency Code blank.

Note: If a value is provided here, it limits the balances imported to those that contain amatching currency code.

7. Balance Method: Select Standard.

8. Exchange Rate Options: Select the same currency rate that is used to revalue period-endbalances in the source system.

9. Click Save.

PeopleSoft Source System

If the source system is PeopleSoft, in the Source Filters section, make these selections:

1. Amount Type: Select Monetary.

2. Amount for Income Statement Accounts: Select YTD.

3. Currency Type: Select the value that corresponds with the currency bucket to be assigned inthis Data Load Rule (per the Category value selected in the Details section).

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 203

Page 204: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Choose one:

l If the ledgers associated with this Data Load Rule are the primary (not translated)ledgers, then Entered and Functional currency types are typically mapped to the Enteredand Functional currency buckets within ARM:

m If Category = Entered (or its equivalent in ARM), select Entered.

m If Category = Functional (or its equivalent in ARM), select Functional.

l If the ledgers associated with this Data Load Rule are translated ledgers, then the Enteredcurrency type is not mapped, because it was already mapped from the primary ledger.The Functional currency bucket (containing the translated balances) is mapped to theReporting currency bucket in ARM:

m If Category = Reporting (or its equivalent in ARM), select Functional.

4. Ledger Group: Select the Ledger Group.

5. Ledger: Select the Ledger.

6. Exchange Rate Options: Select the same currency rate that is used to revalue period-endbalances in the source system.

7. Click Save.

Configuring Data Load Rules for File-Based Data LoadsIf the Location references a file, complete the fields in Details:

1. Name: Provide a Name for the Data Load Rule. In the Data Load Rule name includedescriptive information about the source system from which balances are obtained and thecurrency bucket to be assigned to the balances.

2. Category: Select the currency bucket to be assigned to the balances from the Categoryselection.

3. File Name: Provide the static name of the file (the part of the name that does not changefrom period to period).

204 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 205: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

4. File Name Suffix Type: If a suffix will be appended to the file name each period, then chooseone of these options. For information on using file suffixes, see “File-Naming Convention”on page 181:

l Period Key: The value appended to the file must match the Period Key value associatedwith the Application Mapping in the Period Mapping configuration.

l Period Description: The value appended to the file must match the Period Name valueassociated with the Application Mapping in the Period Mapping configuration.

5. Period Key Date Format: If Period Key is chosen as the File Name Suffix Type, specify theformat for the provided date. Specify the format using the symbols in this table. For example,consider the following format variations for July 1, 2012:

l MM-dd-yyyy (07-01-2012)

l MMM-d-yy (Jul-1-12)

Symbol Meaning Example

M Month M = 7

MM= 07

MMM = Jul

MMMM = July

Note: The “M” must be capitalized.

d Day d = 1

dd= 01

MMM = Jul

Note: The “d” must be lowercase.

y Year yy = 12

yyyy= 2012

Note: Note the “y” must be lower case.

Configuring Data Load Mapping

Subtopics

l Rules Assigning ARM Profile IDs

l Rules Assigning ARM Balance Source Types

l Importing Data Load Mappings

Data load mapping determines how ARM profile IDs and balance source types are assigned tosource system balances. Mapping rules are associated with locations, and you can use severalmapping methods to assign locations: Explicit, Between, Multi-Dimension, and Like.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 205

Page 206: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To configure data load mappings:

1 On Tasks, in Data Load , click the Data Load Mapping link.

2 Select the location for which mappings are being configured.

Rules Assigning ARM Profile IDsFor ARM, use the Multi-Dimension method to configure mapping rules to assign ARM ProfileID. This method enables Profile IDs to be assigned to source system accounts based on valuescontained in source account segments. See “Importing Data Load Mappings” on page 209.

ä To manually create mapping rules to assign ARM Profile IDs:

1 Select Profile from the Dimension selection. This means that the mapping rules specified are used forassigning an ARM Profile ID.

2 Select the Multi-Dimension tab.

3 To add a mapping rule, click Add.

4 Enter the following fields:

l Target Value: Enter the ARM Profile ID, or click the browse icon to select from the listof Profile IDs.

l Rule Name: Oracle recommends using the ARM Profile ID as the rule name, too.

5 To add criteria for determining which source system accounts are assigned this Profile ID, click Add.

For example, if assigning Profile ID 100-1510 to all accounts where Company Code=100and Account=1510, then two rows should be added to the Multi-Dimension table:

l The first row contains a condition on the source system Company segment:

m Dimension: Company

m Condition: Explicit (the source segment value must match the value specified in theValue field for the Profile ID to be assigned)

m Value: 100

l The second row contains a condition on the source system Account segment:

m Dimension: Account

m Condition: Explicit

m Value: 1510

The segments displayed in the dimension selection are those that were configured asLOOKUP Dimensions. See “Configuring LOOKUP Dimensions” on page 188. Whenmultiple criteria are specified by adding multiple rows to the Multi-Dimension table, allspecified criteria must be met for the Profile ID to be assigned (the criteria are joined togetherwith an implicit AND conjunction).

206 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 207: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

If the criteria must accommodate a range of values, consider using the Between condition.Specify the starting and ending range, with a comma in between. For example: 1510, 1520selects accounts from 1510 to 1520.

If the criteria must accommodate a partial value in a source account segment, consider usingthe Like condition. For example, if Profile ID 100-1510-2XXX should be assigned to allaccounts where Company = 100, Account = 1510, and Department starts with 2, thecondition for Department should be created using the Like condition, using the asterisk(*) to behave has a wildcard. For example, “2*” selects accounts in which Department startswith 2. Refer to the Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management ERP IntegrationAdapter for Oracle Applications Administrator's Guide for information on other specialcharacters.

6 Click OK to close the Multi-Dimension dialog box.

7 Change Sign: When selected, causes ERP Integrator to adjust the sign of the balance. The status ofChange Sign depends on the interface method used by the configuration of the mapping rules for theLocation:

l If the Location is importing balances from a supported ERP Integrator source system,balances are always imported in absolute value:

m Assets and expenses are positive if the value is a debit and negative if the value is acredit.

m Liabilities, revenue, and equity are positive if the value is a credit and negative if thevalue is a debit.

l If the Location is importing balances from a file using File-Based Data Loads, thebalances are imported using the sign in the file. See “File-Based Data Loads” on page181.

ARM requires debit balances to be positive and credit balances to be negative, regardless ofthe account type. Therefore, select Change Sign for liability, revenue, and equity accountswhen importing balances from supported ERP Integrator source systems.

For File-Based Data Loads, the sign depends on the structure of the data in the file. If thedata conforms to ARM’s requirements (debits are positive and credits are negative), thendo not select the box. If the sign is based on the account type, then select the box for liability,revenue, and equity accounts.

IGNORE Mapping Rules

Some source system accounts may have a reason for being excluded from mapping rules. Forexample, when mapping accounts to profiles in ARM that are part of the Balance Sheetreconciliation process, only balance sheet accounts should be mapped. Ignore income statementaccounts, which are not relevant to this process.

Accounts that should be excluded from mapping must be provided an IGNORE mapping rule,using the procedures outlined below. If not, such accounts will appear in ARM as “UnmappedAccounts” when data loads are executed.

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 207

Page 208: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

ä To configure IGNORE mapping rules:

1 To add a row to the Multi-Dimension table, click Add.

2 In the Rule Name and Target Value, enter IGNORE.

3 To configure the criteria determining which source system balances should be ignored, click Add. Forexample, if Income Statement accounts should be ignored, and the account number for these accountsstart with “3” or “4”, then two rules should be added, using the Like condition:

l Accounts starting with a “3”:

m Dimension: Account

m Condition: Like

m Value: 3*

l Accounts starting with a “4”:

m Dimension: Account

m Condition: Like

m Value: 4*

Conflicting Mapping Rules

It is possible to define conflicting mapping rules (rules that attempt to assign a different ProfileID to the same source system account. If this occurs, the rule that appears first in the list “wins”.Subsequent rules affecting the same source system account are ignored.

Rules Assigning ARM Balance Source TypesBalance Source Types enable ARM to classify a balance as either a source system balance or asubsystem balance.

Examples:

l A reconciliation is performed as part of the Balance Sheet reconciliation process in ARM,comparing a general ledger balance to the corresponding AP Subledger balance. Theobjective of the reconciliation is to verify that the general ledger balance is correct. In thiscase, the general ledger balance should be assigned a Source Type of “source system”, andthe AP subledger balance should be assigned a Source Type of “subsystem”.

l A reconciliation is performed as part of the Consolidation System reconciliation process inARM, comparing balances in HFM to the general ledger balances. The objective of thereconciliation is to verify that the HFM balance is correct. In this case, the HFM balanceshould be assigned a Source Type of “source system”, and the general ledger balances shouldbe assigned a Source Type of “subsystem”.

The key point to remember is that Source Type “source system” should be assigned to the balanceto be reconciled, whereas the Source Type “subsystem” should be assigned to balances used forcomparison purposes.

208 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 209: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Mapping rules to assign balance Source Types are expected to be configured using the Likemethod, which enables Source Types to be assigned to source system accounts based on one“wildcard”criterion.

ä To configure mapping rules to assign Source Types, perform the following procedures:

1 In Dimension, select Source Type. This means that the mapping rules specified are used for assigningan ARM balance Source Type.

2 Select the Like tab.

3 To add a mapping rule, click Add, using the following configuration:

l Source Value: Enter “*” to select all source values, since all source values are assignedthe same Target Value.

l Target Value: Click the browse icon and select the value (source system or sub-system)from the list provided.

l Rule Name: Oracle recommends using the Target Value as the Rule Name, for simplicity.

Note: An IGNORE mapping rule is not required for the Source Type dimension. TheIGNORE rule configured for the Profile dimension causes the same accounts to beignored for the Source Type dimension.

Importing Data Load Mappings

Subtopics

l Importing File Format

l Checking the Change Sign Check Box for Imported Mappings

l Creating a Template to Import Data Load Mappings

l Re-Importing Mapping Rules

Customers using ERP Integrator to import balances to ARM will have at least one mapping rulefor every reconciliation performed in ARM. Many companies will have thousands of mappingrules. Oracle recommends turning off the validate option when importing large numbers ofmappings. Invalid mappings are detected during data import, and you can correct them then.

Importing File Format

Mappings can be imported from TXT and CSV files. The file format depends on whichdimensions are used when specifying mapping criteria and how these dimensions were mappedto the staging table in the Import Format configuration. In general, the import file contains thefollowing four columns, in the order listed (from left to right):

l Mapping criteria

l Target Account

l Description

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 209

Page 210: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Columns in the import file may be separated by these characters:

l ,

l ;

l |

The following example lists source system segments Company and Account used as mappingcriteria. These segments were configured as LOOKUP Dimensions and mapped in the ImportFormat to the UD2 and UD3 staging table columns:

Source System Segments Mapped to Staging Table Column

Company UD2

Account UD3

In this example, the import file would appear as follows:

Note: The file does not contain a header row. Column A contains the mapping criteria, columnB contains the Target Account, column C contains the rule name, and column D containsa description of the rule (description is optional, so this column may be blank).

The mapping criteria column is prefixed with “#MULTIDIM”, which identifies to ERPIntegrator that Multi-Dimension mapping is being used. Following this prefix, the mappingcriteria column contains a concatenation of all of the criteria required to assign a Profile ID toa source system account. Row 1, for example, assigns Profile ID 100-1500 to any source systemaccount where Company (UD2) equals 100 and Account (UD3) equals 1510.

Because mapping rules are generally related to ARM profile segment values, after the structureof the mapping file is understood, the concatenate function in spreadsheet programs helps createimport files based on ARM Profile Segment values.

ä To use the concatenate function:

1 Split the text from Column A into the following component columns, leaving empty columns for thesegment values:

2 Copy the ARM Profile Segment values into the empty columns:

210 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 211: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

3 Add a concatenate function to column F that concatenates the values from columns A-E:

4 Add a concatenate function to column G to create the Target Account value:

5 Add a formula to column H to set the value equal to column G to create the Rule Name column:

6 Copy the formulas in columns F, G, & H to each row to be imported.

7 When you are ready to finalize the import file, copy the columns F-H, and “paste special” to paste thevalues.

8 Delete columns A-E, and your import file should be ready:

Checking the Change Sign Check Box for Imported Mappings

The Change Sign setting is incorporated into the Target Account column. If Change Sign shouldbe checked for a given rule, then precede the Target Account value by a hyphen.

For example, if the Target Account value should be “100-150”, the value appearing in the TargetAccount column should be “-100-1500”:

Configuring ERP Integrator for ARM 211

Page 212: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Creating a Template to Import Data Load Mappings

To determine the correct Import Format, create a mapping rule manually using the previousprocedures, and then use the Export feature to export the mapping rule. The resulting filecontains the proper format for importing rules.

ä To create a template to import data load mappings:

1 On the Tasks navigator, in the data load section, click the data load mapping link.

2 Select the Location for which mappings are being configured.

3 Select the Multi-Dimension tab.

4 Select the Dimension that you are creating mapping rules for (either Profile or Source Type), clickExport, and then select Current Dimension.

5 In the Specify file location dialog, provide a file name, and click OK.

6 When the import is complete, click on the name of the file in the file list and choose to save the file toyour computer. Once saved, you can edit the file.

Re-Importing Mapping Rules

Mapping rules can be imported multiple times to either replace existing mapping rules, or toupdate mapping rules (using the merge option) so they match the configuration in the latestfile. The merge option uses the Rule Name to identify records to be updated. If this option isselected, then any record in Oracle Hyperion Financial Data Quality Management ERPIntegration Adapter for Oracle Applications with a Rule Name that matches a Rule Name in thefile is updated.

212 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 213: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Supported Currency Codes in ARM

Subtopics

l Currency Codes AED - ITL

l Currency Codes JMD - USS

l Currency Codes UYI - ZWL

Currency Codes AED - ITLThe following currencies are supported in ARM:

Currency Code Country Currency Code Country

AED UAE Dirham CVE Cape Verde Escudo

AFN Afghani CYP CYP

ALL Lek CZK Czech Koruna

AMD Armenian Dram DEM German Mark

ANG Netherlands Antillean Guilder DJF Djibouti Franc

AOA Kwanza DKK Danish Krone

ARS Argentine Peso DOP Dominican Peso

ATS Austrian Schilling DZD Algerian Dinar

AUD Australian Dollar EEK Estonia

AWG Aruban Guilder EGP Egyptian Pound

AZN Azerbaijanian Manat ERN Nakfa

BAM Convertible Mark ESP Spain

BBD Barbados Dollar ETB Ethiopian Birr

BDT Taka EUR Euro

BEF Belgium EUR Euro

BGN Bulgarian Lev FIM Finland

BHD Bahraini Dinar FJD Fiji Dollar

BIF Burundi Franc FKP Falkland Islands Pound

BMD Bermudian Dollar FRF French Franc

BND Brunei Dollar GBP Pound Sterling

BOB Boliviano GEL Lari

Supported Currency Codes in ARM 213

Page 214: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Currency Code Country Currency Code Country

BOV Mvdol GHS Cedi

BRL Brazilian Real GIP Gibraltar Pound

BSD Bahamian Dollar GMD Dalasi

BTN Ngultrum GNF Guinea Franc

BWP Pula GRD Greece

BYR Belarussian Ruble GTQ Quetzal

BZD Belize Dollar GYD Guyana Dollar

CAD Canadian Dollar HKD Hong Kong Dollar

CDF Congolese Franc HNL Lempira

CHE WIR Euro HRK Croatian Kuna

CHF Swiss Franc HTG Gourde

CHW WIR Franc HUF Forint

CLF Unidades de fomento IDR Rupiah

CLP Chilean Peso IEP Ireland

CNY Yuan Renminbi ILS New Israeli Sheqel

COP Colombian Peso INR Indian Rupee

COU Unidad de Valor Real IQD Iraqi Dinar

CRC Costa Rican Colon IRR Iranian Rial

CUC Peso Convertible ISK Iceland Krona

CUP Cuban Peso ITL Italian Lira

Currency Codes JMD - USS

Currency Code Country Currency Code Country

JMD Jamaican Dollar NZD New Zealand Dollar

JOD Jordanian Dinar OMR Rial Omani

JPY Yen PAB Balboa

KES Kenyan Shilling PEN Nuevo Sol

KGS Som PGK Kina

214 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 215: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Currency Code Country Currency Code Country

KHR Riel PHP Philippine Peso

KMF Comoro Franc PKR Pakistan Rupee

KPW North Korean Won PLN Zloty

KRW Won PTE Portugal

KWD Kuwaiti Dinar PYG Guarani

KYD Cayman Islands Dollar QAR Qatari Rial

KZT Tenge RON Leu

LAK Kip RSD Serbian Dinar

LBP Lebanese Pound RUB Russian Ruble

LKR Sri Lanka Rupee RWF Rwanda Franc

LRD Liberian Dollar SAR Saudi Riyal

LSL Loti SBD Solomon Islands Dollar

LTL Lithuanian Litas SCR Seychelles Rupee

LUF Luxembourg SDG Sudanese Pound

LVL Latvian Lats SEK Swedish Krona

LYD Libyan Dinar SGD Singapore Dollar

MAD Moroccan Dirham SHP Saint Helena Pound

MDL Moldovan Leu SIT Slovenia, Tolar

MGA Malagasy Ariary SKK Slovakia, Koruna

MKD Denar SLL Leone

MMK Kyat SOS Somali Shilling

MNT Tugrik SRD Surinam Dollar

MOP Pataca STD Dobra

MRO Ouguiya SVC El Salvador Colon

MTL Malta SYP Syrian Pound

MUR Mauritius Rupee SZL Lilangeni

MVR Rufiyaa THB Baht

MWK Kwacha TJS Somoni

Supported Currency Codes in ARM 215

Page 216: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Currency Code Country Currency Code Country

MXN Mexican Peso TMT New Manat

MXP Old Mexican Peso TND Tunisian Dinar

MXV Mexican Unidad de Inversion (UDI) TOP Pa’anga

MYR Malaysian Ringgit TRY Turkish Lira

MZN Metical TTD Trinidad and Tobago Dollar

NAD Namibia Dollar TWD New Taiwan Dollar

NGN Naira TZS Tanzanian Shilling

NIO Cordoba Oro UAH Hryvnia

NIS Israel Shekel UGX Uganda Shilling

NLG Dutch Guilders USD US Dollar

NOK Norwegian Krone USN US Dollar (Next day)

NPR Nepalese Rupee USS US Dollar (Same day)

Currency Codes UYI - ZWL

Currency Code Country

UYI Uruguay Peso en Unidades Indexadas (URUIURUI)

UYU Peso Uruguayo

UZS Uzbekistan Sum

VAL Vatican City

VEF Bolivar Fuerte

VND Dong

VUV Vatu

WST Tala

XAF CFA Franc BEAC

XCD East Caribbean Dollar

XOF CFA Franc BCEAO

XPF CFP Franc

YER Yemeni Rial

216 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 217: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Currency Code Country

ZAR Rand

ZAR South African Rand

ZMK Zambian Kwacha

ZWL Zimbabwe Dollar

ERP Integrator for ARM Troubleshooting

ODI Studio Error Message

If a message like the following appears in ODI studio:

Com.sunopsis.sql.SnpsMissingParametersException: ODI-30058: -SCEN_NAME parameter is mandatory.

at com.sunopsis.dwg.tools.StartScen.verifyProperty(StartScen.java:762)

at com.sunopsis.dwg.function.SnpsFunctionBaseRepositoryConnected.execute

navigate to the Import Format configuration page, and click Regenerate ODI Scenario (see“Regenerating ODI Scenario” on page 200).

ERP Integrator for ARM Troubleshooting 217

Page 218: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

218 Configuring ERP Integrator for Account Reconciliation Manager

Page 219: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Index

Aaccess rights, assigning, 122account reconciliation, 113Account Reconciliation Manager

about, 113setting up , 119terms, 113

accounting entities, 194aging buckets, 113

creating, 129deleting, 131editing, 130

alert typescreating, 33deleting, 35editing, 33finding, 34

applications, managing, 42approvers

adding to tasks, 88reordering for tasks, 88security rights, 24

assigneessecurity rights, 24

attributes, 113applying to task types, 60applying to tasks, 90applying to templates, 70creating, 29deleting, 31duplicating, 30editing, 30

CCalendar view, 49category mapping, 191change sign, 207

Close Administrator role, 24, 120Close Power User role, 24Close User role, 24columns

displaying, 52reordering, 53

commentatorssecurity roles, 120

currencydefining, 125defining currency buckets, 125defining rate types, 126importing balances, 182

currency ratescreating, 139deleting, 140editing, 140importing, 139managing, 139

custom attributes, 29creating, 141deleting, 141duplicating, 141editing, 141managing, 140

DDashboard view, 48data load mapping, 205, 206

create an import template, 212imporing, 209

data load process, 183data load rules, 194, 201dimension details, 187

Eentities

A C D E F G I L O P Q R S T U V Y

Index 219

Page 220: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

accounting, 194ERPi source systems

configuring data load rules, 194registering source systems for, 180

Ffile columns, 182file naming convention, 181

static file name, 181static file name plus a period suffix, 181

file-based data loads, 181configuring data load rules, 194registering source systems for, 180

filtered viewsdeleting, 55saving, 55

formatsadding format attributes, 134managing, 131setting format properties, 131specifying format instructions, 133specifying format questions, 134viewing format history, 136

frequenciescreating, 125deleting, 125managing, 124

GGantt view, 50

Iimport formats

configuring, 195instructions for tasks, 86integration types

creating, 37deleting, 42editing, 39exporting, 42importing, 41validating, 40

Llocations, 195

configuring, 200LOOKUP dimensions, 188

OODI scenario

regenerate, 200open interface method, 180overview

Account Reconciliation Manager, 114Close Manager, 20

Pparameters for integration types, 38period key

date format, 205mapping, 190period suffix, 181

period nameperiod suffix, 181

period suffix, 181periods, 113

copying, 161creating, 137deleting, 138editing, 138identifying missing profiles, 161loading data, 159managing, 136viewing period history, 138

periods, defining in Close Manager, 28post-processing, 183predecessors for tasks, 89preparers

security rights, 120prerequisites, 14profile segments

creating, 123deleting, 124editing, 124managing, 123

profiles, 113creating, 149editing, 153managing, 149

properties of tasks, 84

A C D E F G I L O P Q R S T U V Y

220 Index

Page 221: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

Qquestions for tasks, 87

Rreconciliation, 113

status, 148reconciliation processes

multiple, 185reconciliations, 163references for tasks, 86register source adapter, 193report binders

generating, 175in Account Reconciliation Manager, 175in Close Manager, 109viewing, 176

reviewerssecurity rights, 120

Sschedules

creating, 78, 96deleting, 107editing, 99locking, 105status, 96validating, 105viewing history, 105

security roles, 24, 120Account Reconciliation Manager, 120

setting upClose Manager, 23

setting up the system, 24source system, 114source types

rules assigning ARM , 208staging, 183status

of reconciliations, 148of schedules, 96of tasks, 56

summary information for tasks, 55summary information for views, 148system attributes

managing, 127

Ttarget application, 187Task List view, 49task lists

navigating, 53task types

applying attributes, 60creating, 58deleting, 65editing, 62

tasksadding questions, 87applying attributes, 90authorizing, 102creating, 84defining children, 86deleting, 92filtering, 54finding, 91setting access, 88setting parameters, 86setting predecessors, 89setting properties, 84status, 56viewing history, 90

templatesadding tasks, 72applying attributes, 70creating, 68day labels, 70deleting, 81embedded, 71importing tasks, 73instructions, 69manually validating, 79opening, 71properties, 68updating, 72viewers, 69

termsAccount Reconciliation Manager, 113Close Manager, 19

Uusers

reassigning, 77, 102security roles, 24

A C D E F G I L O P Q R S T U V Y

Index 221

Page 222: Oracle® Hyperion Financial Close Management · PDF filePart II. Account Reconciliation Manager ..... 111 Chapter 10. About Account Reconciliation Manager

setting up, 24

Vvalidation

of schedules, 105of templates, 79

viewersadding to tasks, 88assigning to templates, 69security roles, 120

viewsavailable actions, 51Calendar, 49Dashboard, 48Gantt, 50selecting, 51Task List, 49

Yyears, defining in Close Manager, 27

A C D E F G I L O P Q R S T U V Y

222 Index